JP7154566B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a technique of a game machine having a decorative portion capable of executing an effect visible to a player is known (see Patent Document 1) .

The gaming machine described in the above publication has a configuration in which a lamp substrate on which a light source is mounted is accommodated in a lens cover attached to a front frame in the decorative portion, and light from the light source is emitted to the outside through the lens cover. Equipped with an illumination device that

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-143403

In such a game machine, it is desired to further improve the game playability by using the decorative portion as described above to produce an effect that is visible to the player .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving game playability.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine comprising a decorative portion capable of executing an effect that is visible to a player, wherein the decorative portion includes light emitting means, a substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, and the A light guide member that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means, a base member arranged on the back side of the substrate, and arranged at a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means can enter through the light guide member. a light-transmitting member located outside of at least one end of the substrate from a position covering the mounting surface of the light-emitting means on the substrate, and on the substrate The base member extends beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means, and is formed of a reflecting member capable of reflecting light, and includes at least one end portion of the substrate and an end portion of the light guide member. and a position outside the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate, the light emitted from the end of the light transmitting member and the light emitted from the end of the light guide member The light guide member is provided at a reflective position, and the light guide member extends between the base member and the rear surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted in the thickness direction of the substrate. Characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve game playability .

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. Similarly, the disassembled perspective view which shows an external appearance. Similarly, the front view which shows the appearance of a game board. Similarly, the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special pattern display part. Similarly, a block diagram showing a main control circuit. Similarly, (a) a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. (b) A table showing specifications of a normal symbol game. (c) A table showing distribution of hits. (d) A table showing types of hits. Similarly, a flow chart showing the flow of the game. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 7; Similarly, the flowchart which shows the main process performed by a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the system timer interrupt processing performed by a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special design control processing which is executed with the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a winning start interval management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a big winning opening re-open waiting time management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a big winning opening opening process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a winning end interval process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol game ending process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the main process performed by a sub-control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sub-control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the sub-control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by the sub-control circuit. Flow chart showing the continuation of. The front view which shows the appearance of the game board in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 2nd embodiment of this invention. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the main process performed by a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the sorting apparatus control process performed by a main control circuit. The front view which showed the center accessory and the starting opening unit. The front perspective view which showed the center accessory and the starting opening unit. The rear view showing the center accessory and the starting unit. The rear perspective view which showed the center accessory and the starting opening unit. The top perspective view which showed the croon. The downward perspective view which showed the croon. The top view which showed the croon. Side sectional drawing which showed the croon. Front perspective view showing a game ball distribution device, a central gutter and a starting port unit. The disassembled perspective view which showed the game ball distribution apparatus. The disassembled perspective view which showed the game ball distribution apparatus. Left side view showing the game ball sorting device. The left side view which showed the state which closed the communicating hole by the game ball distribution apparatus. Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view showing the central gutter and starting port unit; FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view showing the central gutter and starting port unit; The left side view which showed the state which opened|released the communicating hole by the game ball distribution apparatus. The left side view which showed the state which closed the communicating hole by the game ball distribution apparatus. Partial rear perspective view of the game board showing the flow of game balls. The top view of the croon which showed the flow of a game ball. The top view of the croon which showed the flow of a game ball. Front cross-sectional view of the croon showing the flow of the game ball. A plan view of a croon showing the flow of game balls in the prior art. Partial front perspective view of the game board showing the flow of game balls. An exploded front perspective view showing a central gutter and a starting port unit, showing the flow of game balls on a disadvantageous course. Front exploded perspective view showing the central gutter and the starting port unit, showing the flow of game balls on an advantageous course. Rear exploded perspective view showing the central gutter and the starting port unit, showing the flow of game balls on an advantageous course. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a first movable accessory unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first movable accessory unit; FIG. 4 is a front view with a part of the first movable accessory unit omitted; FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view with a part of the first movable accessory unit omitted; FIG. 3 is an external perspective view with a part of the first movable accessory unit omitted; It is the enlarged rear view which abbreviate|omits a part which shows a 1st movable mechanism. It is the external appearance perspective view which abbreviate|omitted one part which shows a 1st movable mechanism. It is the front view which abbreviate|omitted a part which shows the 1st movable mechanism of a descending state. It is the enlarged rear view which abbreviate|omits one part which shows a 2nd movable mechanism. It is the enlarged rear view which abbreviate|omits a part which shows the 2nd movable mechanism of a rocking|swiveling state. It is an exploded perspective view showing a middle finger part. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a middle finger portion. It is the enlarged front view which abbreviate|omits a part which shows the 2nd movable mechanism of an initial state. It is the enlarged front view which abbreviate|omits a part which shows the 2nd movable mechanism of a rocking|swiveling state. It is the enlarged front view which abbreviate|omits a part which shows the 3rd movable mechanism of a rotation state. It is a front view showing a gaming machine in which the effect device is in the initial state. It is a front view showing the gaming machine in which the first movable mechanism is in a lowered state. It is a front view showing the gaming machine in which the second movable mechanism is in a swing state. It is a front view showing the gaming machine in which the third movable mechanism is in a rotating state. FIG. 11 is an external perspective view of a second movable accessory unit; FIG. 11 is a front view of a second movable accessory unit; FIG. 10 is a rear view with a part of the second movable accessory unit omitted; FIG. 10 is an enlarged rear view with a part of the second movable accessory unit omitted; FIG. 11 is an external perspective view with a part of the second movable accessory unit omitted; FIG. 11 is a front view showing the movable light emitter in a performance state; FIG. 4 is a partially omitted rear view showing the movable light emitter in a staged state; FIG. 10 is an enlarged rear view, partly omitted, showing the movable light emitter in a staged state; FIG. 4 is a front view showing a part of the constituent members of the movable light emitter; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view with a part of the second movable accessory unit omitted; It is a cross-sectional view showing a blade portion. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the gaming machine in which the movable light emitter is in the initial state; FIG. 10 is a front view showing the gaming machine in which the movable light emitters are in an effect state; It is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a blade portion. FIG. 10 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a blade portion in the second movable accessory unit according to the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an external perspective view showing a movable light emitter in the second movable accessory unit according to the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing finger portions in the second movable accessory unit according to the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing finger portions in the second movable accessory unit according to the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern table selection table. (a) A flowchart showing effect pattern determination processing executed by the sub-control circuit. (b) Similarly, a flowchart showing a winning start effect determination process. (a) A flowchart showing inter-round effect determination processing executed by a sub-control circuit. (b) Similarly, a flowchart showing a winning end effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the hit kind in a JAC game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device while variable display is being performed during the JAC game; It is a figure which shows the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device while a jackpot game is being performed in a JAC game. (a) It is a figure which shows the production|presentation flow of a big-hit game at the time of limit non-reaching. (b) It is a figure which shows the production|presentation flow of a big hit game at the time of limit reach|attainment. (a) It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation displayed by 1st ED production|presentation. 100(b) is a continuation of FIG. 100(a); FIG. (c) It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation displayed by result display production|presentation. 100(d) is a continuation of FIG. 100(c); FIG. (a) It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation displayed by EX game transition production|presentation. 101(b) is a continuation of FIG. 101(a); FIG. 101(c) is a continuation of FIG. 101(b); FIG. (a) It is a diagram showing a darkening start pattern determination table when the reserved ball is first displayed in the fourth reserved ball display area in the first effect of the first look-ahead effect. (b) Similarly, it is a diagram showing a blackout start pattern determination table when the ball on hold is first displayed in the third ball on hold display area. (c) Similarly, it is a diagram showing a blackout start pattern determination table when a held ball is first displayed in the second held ball display area. (a) It is a diagram showing a holding group non-notification character selection table for the second effect of the first look-ahead effect. (b) Similarly, it is a diagram showing a continuous hold notification character selection table. 11 is a flowchart showing effect pattern determination processing relating to a character appearance propriety determination table; (a) It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production|presentation content of the 1st look-ahead production|presentation. (b) Similarly, it is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 105(a). (c) Similarly, it is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 105(b). (d) Similarly, it is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 105(c). (e) Similarly, it is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 105(d). (f) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG.105(e). (g) Similarly, it is a figure showing the continuation of FIG.105(f). (h) Similarly, it is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 105(g). (a) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG.105(h). (b) Similarly, it is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 106(a). (c) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG.106(b). (d) Similarly, it is a figure which shows another example of the continuation of FIG.106(b). This is the effect flow of the big hit effect when the second look-ahead effect is not performed. This is the effect flow of the big hit effect when the second look-ahead effect is performed. A flow chart showing a second look-ahead effect execution determination process. In the small winning game, when two game balls win the big winning opening, it is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In the small winning game, it is a diagram showing an example of the effect content of the holding consecutive suggestion effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device when two game balls win in the big winning hole. The flowchart which shows a small-hit game prize ball number display process. It is a flowchart which shows the game evaluation process in a JAC game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a game count rank point determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rank point determination table for the number of JACs; It is a figure which shows the rank point determination table of the number of acquired balls. It is a figure which shows a comprehensive rank determination table. It is a figure which shows the game evaluation result display screen in a JAC game. It is a figure which shows another example of the game evaluation result display screen in a JAC game. 4 is a flowchart showing fraud detection processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing main CPU activation processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a flow chart showing a payout/launch control circuit activation process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing sub CPU activation processing of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time series of processing after power-on; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main CPU activation processing of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a payout/launch control circuit activation process of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing sub CPU activation processing of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a specific winning effect is performed; 11 is a flowchart showing specific winning effect determination processing;

[Configuration of game machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG.
In the following description, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the front side is defined as the front side, and the back side is defined as the rear side. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, thereby defining the left-right direction.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board 17, a payout unit 18 and a board. A unit 19 is provided.

The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11 . The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the board unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the game board 17 on the front side. To support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. An opening 22 is provided in the glass door 13 . A transparent protective glass 23 is provided in the opening 22 of the glass door 13 . The protective glass 23 is arranged to face a game board 17 (to be described later) in the front-rear direction when the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12 . A speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are arranged above the glass door 13 . The speaker 24 performs, for example, voice notification, presentation, error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is for, for example, notifying with light or performing effects.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The tray unit 14 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13 .

The upper plate 26 is for storing game balls to be shot to the game area 20, which will be described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and a performance button 62. - 特許庁The payout port 61 is for lending game balls and paying out (prize balls). The payout port 61 discharges game balls when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

The lower tray 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26. - 特許庁A payout port 63 is provided in the lower plate 27 . The payout port 63, like the payout port 63 of the upper tray 26, is for renting game balls and paying out (prize balls). The payout port 63 discharges the game balls when the game balls overflow from the upper tray 26.例文帳に追加

The shooting device 15 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 26 to the game area 20 . The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 12 and the lower right portion of the pan unit 14 . The firing device 15 comprises a panel body 31 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 32 .

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15 . The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31 . The driving device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 31 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid. Thus, in the shooting device 15, when the shooting handle 32 is operated by the player, game balls are shot by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of hit determination and various images related to the game. The various images include, for example, an identification pattern (decorative pattern) for production, a production image during a big win, a demonstration production image, and the number of suspensions of variable display of identification patterns. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 17 (on the inner peripheral side of the center accessory 42, which will be described later).

The game board 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 23 . On the front side of the game board 17, a game area 20 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 17 includes a guide rail 41, a center accessory 42, a game ball distribution device 5400 (first starting port 5442), a normal electric accessory unit 400 (second starting port 440 and a normal electric Accessory 460), passage gate 49, attacker unit 500 (large prize winning opening 540 and special electric accessory 600), general winning openings 53, 54, 450, outlet 55, LED unit 70, decorative member 56, movable accessory unit 57.

The guide rail 41 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter referred to as "outer rail 41a" and "inner rail 41b"). The outer rail 41 a mainly partitions (defines) the game area 20 . The outer rail 41a is arranged so as to surround the game area 20. - 特許庁The inner rail 41b is for guiding the shot game ball to the upper part of the game area 20 together with the outer rail 41a. The inner rail 41b is arranged on the left side of the game board 17 inside the outer rail 41a.

The center accessory 42 is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front. Inside (inner peripheral side) of the center accessory 42, the game board 17 is opened and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is formed. The center accessory 42 is fixed to the game board 17 using screws or the like. Various decorations visible to the player are applied to the front side surface of the center accessory 42 . A frame-like member is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the center role 42 to prevent game balls from entering the inside of the center role 42 . In addition, the upper part of the center role 42 can divide the game ball flowing-down area in the game area 20 into the left and right of the center role 42 .

Incidentally, the game ball shot by the shooting device 15 collides with the center accessory 42, the game nail 68 driven into the game board 17, etc., and flows down toward the bottom of the game board 17 while changing the traveling direction. . The shot game balls are distributed to the flow-down areas according to the amount of operation of the shooting handle 32. - 特許庁Specifically, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 32 is small, the shot game ball flows down the left side of the center accessory 42 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 32 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right side of the center accessory 42 . A hitting method in which the game ball flows down to the left side of the center role 42 is called "left hitting", and a hitting method in which the game ball flows down to the right side of the center role 42 is called "right hitting".

The game ball distribution device 5400 is a device for appropriately distributing game balls to the first starting port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444 . The game ball distribution device 5400 is arranged substantially in the lower center of the game area 20 .

The first starting port 5442 gives the opportunity for the hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol which will be described later. It gives an opportunity to display on the display unit 74 . A first starting port switch 5472 is arranged in the first starting port 5442 (see FIG. 5). When the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472. - 特許庁When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, a hit determination is performed inside the pachinko game machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. Alternatively, it is dispensed (discharged) from the dispensing port 63 to the upper tray 26 or the lower tray 27 . In addition, winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is performed by hitting to the left.
A detailed description of the configuration of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be given later.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20 .

The second starting port 440 gives the opportunity for the hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol which will be described later. It gives an opportunity to display on the display unit 74 . A second start port switch 441 is arranged in the second start port 440 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball enters the second starting port 440 , the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 . When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, a hit determination is performed inside the pachinko game machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a preset number of game balls are Alternatively, it is dispensed (discharged) from the dispensing port 63 to the upper tray 26 or the lower tray 27 . The winning difficulty of the second starting port 440 is determined by the normal electric accessory 460 . It should be noted that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by hitting to the right.

The normal electric accessory 460 includes a wing member 461 that can rotate in the horizontal direction, and a starting solenoid 462 (see FIG. 5) that drives the wing member 461 . The ordinary electric accessory 460 is arranged above the second starting port 440 . The normal electric accessory 460 can be shifted (driven) between an open state in which the passage of game balls is easy and a closed state in which the passage of game balls is difficult, by driving the blade member 461 by the starting solenoid 462. configured to When a game ball passes through the blade member 461 in the normal electric accessory 460, the game ball is won in the second starting port 440. - 特許庁The opening/closing drive by the normal electric accessory 460 (wing member 461) is performed only for a predetermined period and times when the normal pattern in the normal pattern display portion 71 is in a specific stop display mode.

The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is arranged on the central right part of the game board 17 and above the normal electric accessory unit 400 . The pass gate 49 is provided with a pass gate switch 49a (see FIG. 5). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2). It should be noted that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 is performed by hitting to the right.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the big winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the normal electric accessory unit 400 .

The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a winning game state (big winning game state or small winning game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the count switch 541 detects the game ball that has won the prize. When game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move back and forth, and a winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 5) that drives the shutter 610 . The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the big winning opening 540 . The special electric accessory 600 has an open state that enables (or facilitates) entry of game balls into the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid 620, and It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is such that the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74, and the winning game state (jackpot game state or It is performed when it is shifted to a small hit game state).

The general prize winning openings 53 and 54 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board 17 while being spaced apart from each other. Also, the general prize winning port 450 is provided in the normal electric accessory unit 400 . The general winning openings 53, 54, 450 are provided with general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 451 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball enters the general winning opening 53/54/450, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a/54a/451. When game balls are detected by the general winning port switches 53a, 54a, and 451, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27). is done).

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls for the first start hole 5442 and the second start hole 440 is 3, the number of prize balls for the general prize holes 53, 54, and 450 is 10, and the number of prize balls for the big prize hole 540 The numbers are set to 15 each. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 55 is arranged at the bottom center of the game board 17 . The out port 55 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not enter each winning (starting) port such as the first starting port 5442 .

The LED unit 70 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board 17 and outside the guide rail 41 . The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display parts are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display portions, a normal symbol display portion 71, a normal symbol reservation display portion 72, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, a first special A design pending display portion 75 and a second special symbol pending display portion 76 are provided.

The normal symbol display section 71 displays the result of determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to be in the open state according to the result of determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display portion 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start variable display in which lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied. A combination (display pattern) by turning on/off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in an open state, the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second start port The winning difficulty of the game ball to 440 is changed.

The normal symbol suspension display section 72 displays the number of execution times of suspended normal symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "suspension number of normal symbol variation display"). The normal symbol reservation display unit 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol suspension display unit 72 displays the number of suspension times of normal symbol variation display by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended twice, the display LED 72a lights up and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 display the result of determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which transition or maintenance of the game state is determined according to the result of determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display portion 73 has a display LED group 73a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 5442 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. In the display LED group 73a, when a predetermined condition for starting variable display is established, the eight LEDs start variable display in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) of lighting and extinguishing of eight LEDs is displayed as a special pattern. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state is such that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 540. Become. In addition, in the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display portion 74 has a display LED group 74a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. In the display LED group 74a, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, the eight LEDs start variable display in which the lighting and extinguishing are repeated. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) of lighting and extinguishing of eight LEDs is displayed as a special pattern. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state is such that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 540. Become. In addition, in the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display section 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

Thus, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the normal The transition from the game state (normal game state) to the winning game state which is advantageous to the player is determined. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big win, the game state is shifted to a big win game state as a win game state. Also, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the game state is shifted to a small hit game state as a hit game state. Thus, in this embodiment, two types of winning game states are provided as the game state to be shifted from the normal game state.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 75 and the second special symbol reserved display unit 76 display the number of executions of variable display of the reserved special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "number of times of suspension of variable display of special symbols"). to display. The first special symbol reservation display unit 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol reservation display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol suspension display portion 75 and the second special symbol suspension display portion 76 display the number of suspension times of special symbol variation display by turning on/off the display LEDs 75a/75b and 76a/76b. The display modes of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 75a, 75b and 76a, 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a, 72b of the reserved display portion 72 for normal symbols.

The decoration member 56 is a member that decorates the game board 17 . The decorative member 56 is arranged on the upper part of the game board 17 and on the inner peripheral side of the center accessory 42 . The decorative member 56 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape whose longitudinal direction is the left-right direction. The front side (player side) of the decorative member 56 is decorated with logos (characters), characters, symbols, and the like. The decorative member 56 is configured to emit light by an LED (not shown) or the like.

The movable accessory unit 57 is a unit body in which a movable accessory, a driving source, and the like, which will be described later, are integrated. The movable accessory unit 57 can perform a predetermined effect operation using the movable accessory to enhance the interest of the player. In this embodiment, the movable role product unit 57 includes a first movable role product unit (production device 2400), a second movable role product unit 82, and a third movable role product unit 83.

The first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400 ) is arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 17 and on the inner peripheral side of the center accessory 42 .
A detailed description of the configuration of the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400) will be given later.

The second movable accessory unit 82 is arranged above the game board 17 and behind the decorative member 56 .
A detailed description of the configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be given later.

The third movable accessory unit 83 is arranged on the right and left sides of the game board 17 behind the center accessory 42, respectively. The third movable accessory unit 83 includes a hand accessory 86 (third movable accessory) imitating a human hand. The hand accessory 86 is configured to be movable. Also, the hand accessory 86 is configured to be lightable. Most of the hand accessory 86 is hidden behind the game board 17 and the center accessory 42 in a standby state (a state in which no effect action is performed) as shown in FIG. 3, making it difficult for the player to see. In addition, most of the hand accessory 86 is exposed in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the operating state (the state in which the effect is being performed), so that the player can easily recognize the hand accessory 86 .

Below, in the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of internal processing when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 is started. In addition, when the game ball wins to the first start port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game to the first start port 5442 is continued until the first special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the win of the ball is suspended. After that, when the first special symbol being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed first special symbol which has been reserved is started.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 is started. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the second special symbol, the game to the second starting port 440 is continued until the second special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. After that, when the second special symbol being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the suspended first special symbol is variably displayed.

In addition, in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change simultaneously. That is, while the special symbols are variably displayed in one of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols are not variably displayed in the other display portion. . In this embodiment, when the execution of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is suspended, the start winning to the second starting port 440 is prioritized, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set to 4 times. Therefore, the maximum number of suspensions of variable display of special symbols is 8 times, which is the sum of the number of suspensions of variable display of special symbols due to the winning of the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440 .

Also, while the first or second special symbols are changing in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, except for specific cases, the identification symbols consisting of numbers on the liquid crystal display device 16 fluctuate. Is displayed. In this embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, as for the identification symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first or second special symbol being variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 is stopped and displayed. Is displayed. The identification pattern is also used as identification information for presentation.

In addition, when the first or second special symbols stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 are in a specific stop display mode, the player is informed of the winning. An effect image to cause is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. - 特許庁In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Further, the specific stop display mode when the first or second special symbol is stop-displayed is set corresponding to the type of win. In such a configuration, the combination of identification symbols stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbols. form. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of winning in addition to the winning. It should be noted that some of the types of hits are displayed in a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize them, depending on the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbols. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the winning and the type of winning.

[Electrical Configuration of Game Machine]
The control circuit of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko game machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 for controlling the game and a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling the performance according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (readable/writable memory), and the like.

The main CPU 101 is connected with a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 102 .

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 101 . In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information of the special symbol game is stored as starting memory. Specifically, the main RAM 103 has a first special symbol start memory area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, and the upper limit of four first special symbol games. A first special symbol start memory area (1) to a first special symbol start memory area (4) are provided in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to a special symbol is stored as a start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start memory area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol being changed is stored as the start memory, and the upper limit four times of the second special game. A second special symbol start memory area (1) to a second special symbol start memory area (4) are provided in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start memory.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101 . The I/O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. A command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub-control circuit 200 . The backup capacitor 107 retains various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, rapidly supplying power to the main RAM 103 when power is cut off.

Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100 .

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display portion 71, a normal symbol pending display portion 72, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, a first special symbol pending display portion 75, A second special symbol reservation display unit 76, a starting solenoid 462 for driving the vane member 461 of the normal electric accessory 460, and a large winning solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610 are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. The main control circuit 100 also includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages the pachinko machines in the hall as a whole. An external terminal board 320 is connected.

In addition, the main control circuit 100 is connected to the first starting switch 5472, the second starting switch 441, the passage gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, the general prize winning switches 53a, 54a, 451, and the like. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the member. Also connected to the main control circuit 100 are a backup clear switch 330 and the like for clearing the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade.

A payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100 . The payout/shooting control circuit 300 is connected with a payout device 340 for putting out game balls, a shooting device 350 for shooting game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation on the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

When the payout/launch control circuit 300 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or a ball rental control signal supplied from the card unit 360, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out game balls. Also, when the player grips the shooting handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the payout/shooting control circuit 300 applies power to the shooting solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation). It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

Furthermore, a sub-control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106 . The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 16, control of sound generated from the speaker 24, control of light from the lamp 25, and the like, according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100. FIG.

In the present embodiment, a command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, but a signal cannot be supplied from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. It may be configured such that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100 .

The sub-control circuit 200 includes a sub-CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 100 . Also, the sub-control circuit 200 is connected with a production button switch 310 that is turned on and off by operating the production button 62 .

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 202 . In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100 .

The program ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In this embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a computer-readable storage medium having control means is used. If so, another mode may be used. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device, a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the programs, tables, etc. may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like, instead of being recorded in advance. Furthermore, the programs, tables, etc. may be recorded in different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201 . In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16 . The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that buffers image data, and an image signal that converts image data into an image signal. It includes a D/A converter or the like that converts as

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying images on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 201 . The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification pattern image data showing identification patterns, background image data, image data for effect, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 . In this manner, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 24 . The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 24 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and produces sound from the speaker 24 .

The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamps 25 including decorative lamps and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The role product control circuit 207 is for controlling the movable role product units 57 (first movable role product unit (production device 2400), second movable role product unit 82, and third movable role product unit 83). circuit. The role product control circuit 207 includes a driving circuit for supplying a driving signal to the movable role product unit 57, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role product in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. It has a data ROM and the like.

In addition, the drive circuit selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM according to the role product activation command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Then, the selected motion pattern is read from the role product data ROM, and the mechanical motion of the movable role product unit 57 is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of the movable accessory unit 57 is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

[basic specifications]
The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 6 is a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 6(a) is a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. Also, FIG. 6(b) is a table showing specifications of the normal symbol game. Also, FIG. 6(c) is a table showing the distribution of winnings. FIG. 6(d) is a table showing the types of wins. The data of the tables shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D are stored in the main ROM 102 as tables.

Incidentally, in the special symbol game, the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state or a high probability state. Thus, in the special symbol game, the game state in which the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state is simply referred to as a low probability state (or a normal state or a non-variable probability state). Also, in the special symbol game, a game state in which the jackpot determination is performed in a high probability state is simply referred to as a high probability state (or probability variable state). In this way, when the game state becomes the probability variable state, a state more advantageous than the normal state is given to the player.

Also, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is hit, the opening of the normal electric accessory 460 (normal winning game) is performed for a relatively long time. Thus, in the normal symbol game, a game state in which the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened for a relatively long time is called an electric support state. In addition, in the electric support state, the time per normal symbol determination is shorter than when not in the electric support state. Thus, the state in which the electric sapo state and the time per normal symbol determination is performed in a short time is referred to as a time-saving state. It should be noted that the high probability state of the normal symbol determination is constituted so as to be able to shift when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit or the like. In addition, the high probability state of normal symbol determination ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, such as when the time saving state ends.

Incidentally, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in a game state other than the time saving state. Thus, the game state (game state other than the time saving state) in which the normal symbol determination is not performed is called a normal state (or a non-time saving state). In this way, when the game state becomes the time saving state, a state more advantageous than the non-time saving state is given to the player. In addition, the time-saving state is continued until, for example, the hit determination (big hit determination and small hit determination) in the special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times after shifting from the normal state.

As described above, the normal state indicates a game state in which the jackpot determination is performed with a low probability in the special symbol game, and a game state in which the normal symbol determination is not performed in the normal symbol game.

First, the specifications of the special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 6(a).

As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the special symbol game, the probability that the result of the jackpot determination in the low probability state (normal state) will be a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot probability) is the first start port 5442 and the second In any case of the start winning of the starting port 440, it is commonly set to 1/200 (1 coefficient for 200 random numbers). In addition, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (variable probability state) is 1/100 (for 200 random 2 coefficients). In addition, the probability that the result of the small hit determination will be a hit due to the start winning of the second start port 440 (hereinafter referred to as the small hit probability) is 1/4 (50 coefficients for 200 random numbers) set. It should be noted that the small hit determination by the starting winning prize of the first starting port 5442 is not performed. In other words, the probability that the small winning game is started based on the game ball winning the second starting port 440 is based on the game ball winning the first starting port 5442 and the small winning game is started. is set higher than the probability of

In addition, the number of times of ST is commonly set to 100 times even in the case of a big hit due to any of the starting winning prizes of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 . It should be noted that ST (special time) is a probability variable state that ends according to the number of times (cutting times). In the following, unless otherwise specified, "times" indicates the number of hit determinations (big hit determination and small hit determination) after shifting to the variable probability state.

Note that the number of STs is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when a super-probability variable state, which will be described later, is reached. Specifically, 0 is displayed as an initial value in the super probability variable state. Then, it is displayed that the numerical value is incremented by 1 each time the hit judgment is repeated (the judgment result is a loss). Then, when the value of the number of times of ST reaches 100, the super probability variable state ends. Note that the initial value may be 100 instead of 0. In this way, when the initial value of the number of STs is 100, the numerical value is subtracted by 1 each time the hit determination is repeated.

Also, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting port 5442 is 3, the number of prize balls for winning the second starting port 440 is 1, and the number of prize balls for winning the general winning ports 53, 54, and 450 is 10, and the number of prize balls for winning a prize to the big prize opening 540 is set to 15, respectively. Also, the maximum winning count per opening of the big winning opening 540 in the big winning game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the maximum winning count per opening of the normal electric accessory 460 in the normal symbol game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the number of jackpot symbols is set to 100 in common in any of the start winnings of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 . Also, the number of small winning symbols is set to 100 in the case of starting winning of the second starting port 440 .

Next, the specifications of the normal symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b).

As shown in FIG. 6(b), in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in the low probability state. Also, the probability that the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state is a hit is set to 100/100. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is hit, the second starting port 440 (normal electric accessory 460) is opened three times for a relatively long time of 1.5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6(c), distribution of big wins and small wins will be described.

As shown in FIG.6(c), the big hit by the start winning prize of the 1st starting port 5442 is distributed to six types of jackpot contents (jackpot type). Concretely, the big hit due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is divided into 15R probability variable, substantially 10R probability variable, substantially 5R probability variable, 15R normal, substantially 10R normal, and substantially 5R normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to special figures (1) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by starting winnings of the first starting port 5442, respectively.

Specifically, 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -1. Also, corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -2, real 10R probability variation is set. In addition, corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -3, real 5R probability variation is set. In addition, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -4. Also, corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -5, substantially 10R normal is set. Also, corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -6, substantially 5R normal is set.

In addition, the big hit by the starting winning prize of the second starting port 440 is sorted into 6 types of jackpot contents (jackpot types). Specifically, the big hit by the starting prize of the second starting port 440 is sorted into 15R probability variable, real low ball probability variable, special probability variable, 15R normal, real low ball probability normal, and special normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to special figures (2) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by starting winnings of the second starting port 440, respectively.

Specifically, 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -1. In addition, corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -2, real ball output small probability variation is set. In addition, special probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -3. In addition, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -4. In addition, corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -5, the actual ball output small normal is set. In addition, special normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -6.

Further, the small win is divided into two kinds of small win contents (small win types). Specifically, the small hits are divided into double open (1) and double open (2). These small hit contents are set to correspond to special figures (2) small hits -1 and 2 as small hits, respectively. Specifically, corresponding to special figure (2) small hit -1, open twice (1) is set. In addition, 2 times open (2) is set corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit -2.

Here, the "number" column (notation) shown in the table of FIG. 6(c) indicates the number of big winning symbols or the number of small winning symbols corresponding to each winning content. That is, as described above, since the number of jackpot symbols due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is 100, the special figure (1) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442, The probabilities (expected values) of each distribution are set to be 25%, 15%, 10%, 25%, 15%, and 10%. Similarly, the special figure (2) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the start winning of the second start port 440, and the probability (expected value) of each distribution is 25%, 15%, 10%, It is set to be 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2 are set such that the probabilities (expected values) of being distributed are 98% and 2%, respectively, in the case of a small hit.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6(c), special figure (1) big hit -1 to 6, special figure (2) big hit -1 to 6, and special figure (2) small hit -1 and 2, The number of times of time saving given after the end of each winning game (big winning game or small winning game) is set. The number of time reductions given after the winning game is completed is set differently according to the state of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game when the big win determination or the small win determination is performed.

Here, the notation "HH" shown in the table of FIG. 6(c) indicates that the special symbol game is in the variable probability state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. In addition, the notation of "HL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the variable probability state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. In addition, the notation of "LH" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. In addition, the notation of "LL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. Furthermore, the notation of "during high probability" indicates that during the high probability state in the special symbol game, that is, a maximum of 100 times of time reduction is given.

In such a setting, for example, when the special symbol game is in a non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-saving state (in the case of "LL"), the special figure (1) jackpot -1 or 6 hits , 50 times of time reduction is given. On the other hand, for example, in the case of “LL” as well, when the special figure (1) big hit -2 to 5 hits, the number of times of shortening time is not given. That is, when the special symbol game is in a non-variable state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-saving state, in the case of a big hit due to the start winning of the first start port 5442, 35% (special figure (1) big hit - 25% in case of 1 + special figure (1) jackpot - 10% in case of 6) 50 times of time saving is given, and the remaining 65% probability of time saving is not given.

Further, in the case of a small hit, after the end of the small win game, in principle, the game state before the small win is not changed and is maintained as it is. Specifically, when a small hit occurs during the ST, the ST is restarted so as to continue to count from the number of STs related to the hit determination resulting in the small win after the small win game is finished. For example, when the 60th small hit occurs during the ST, the ST is restarted so as to count from the 61st time after the end of the small win game. In this case, the remaining number of times of ST after the end of the small winning game is 40 times. Similarly, if a small hit occurs during the time saving state, the time saving state is resumed after the small win game is finished so as to continue counting from the number of times related to the hit determination of the small win.

As an exception to the above principle, for example, during the ST, if a small hit occurs at the 100th time (which is the final time of the ST), after the small hit game ends, the ST will be in a state of ending (the state before becoming a small hit is not maintained). Similarly, for example, when a small hit occurs at the 100th time during the time saving state of 100 times, the time saving state ends after the small win game ends (the state before the small win is not maintained).

Below, the winning contents (big winning contents and small winning contents) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6(d).

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the contents of the jackpot (kind of the jackpot), 15R variable probability, 15R normal, substantially 10R variable probability, substantially 10R normal, substantially 5R probability variable, substantially 5R normal, special probability variable, special normal, actual ball output Low probability variation, real ball output low normal, is provided. In addition, two-time opening (1) and (2) are provided as small hit contents (types of small wins).

15R probability variation and 15R normal are jackpots in which the opening seconds of the big winning port 540 per round is set to 27.996 seconds in all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started. be. Thus, in the 15R variable probability and the 15R normal, when the jackpot game is started, the upper limit number of game balls is set to be able to win the big winning hole 540 in all rounds.

Substantial 10R probability variation and substantial 10R normal means that when the jackpot game is started, the opening seconds of the big winning port 540 per round in the 1st to 10th rounds of all 15 rounds is 27.996 seconds. This is a big win in which the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per one round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 11th to 15th rounds. Thus, in the substantial 10R probability variation and the substantial 10R normal, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball is set to be able to win the big prize opening 540 in the 1st to 10th rounds, and in the 11th to 15th rounds The game ball is set so as to make it difficult (substantially impossible) to win a prize in the big prize winning opening 540.例文帳に追加

Substantial 5R probability variation and substantial 5R normal means that when the jackpot game is started, the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round in the 1st to 5th rounds of all 15 rounds is 27.996 seconds. This is a big win in which the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per one round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 6th to 15th rounds. Thus, in the substantial 5R probability variation and the substantial 5R normal, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball is set to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 5th rounds, and in the 6th to 15th rounds The game ball is set so as to make it difficult (substantially impossible) to win a prize in the big prize winning opening 540.例文帳に追加

The special probability variation and special normal are set so that the big winning opening 540 is opened three times in the first round of all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started, and the first round The opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 is set to 0.896 seconds in the first and second openings, and the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 is set to 26.466 seconds in the remaining third opening. In the 15th round from 1, the opening seconds of the big winning hole 540 per round is set to 27.966 seconds. In this way, in the special probability variation and special normal, when the jackpot game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in the first and second openings in the first round (for example, 1 per opening) It is set so that the upper limit number of game balls can be won in the remaining third opening and the 2nd to 15th rounds. In addition, in the special probability variation and the special normal, the opening interval between the second opening and the third opening in the first round is set to 5.0 seconds.

Actual low ball probability change and actual low ball output normal means that when the jackpot game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 0 in the 1st and 2nd rounds out of 15 rounds. 896 seconds, and in the 3rd to 15th rounds, the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds. In this way, when a big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in all rounds (more specifically, in the first and second rounds). , for example, is set to the extent that one game ball wins per opening, and the game ball is almost impossible to win after the third round). In addition, the interval between rounds between the second round and the third round is set to 5.0 seconds in the actual ball payout probability variable and the actual ball payout normal.

Twice open (1) and (2) are small wins in which the big winning opening 540 is opened twice for 0.896 seconds each when a small win game is started. That is, the small winning game is to operate the big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening and closing mode. It is set so that it is difficult to win a prize (for example, one ball per opening) in the big prize opening 540 . It should be noted that, in double opening (1), the small winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 is completed for the second time is set to 1.0 seconds. In addition, in double opening (2), the small winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 is completed for the second time is set to 5.0 seconds.

In this way, the number of seconds the big winning opening 540 is opened in the first and second openings of the first round when the type of jackpot is special probability variable and special normal, and when it is a small win (twice open (1) and (2)) are set to 0.896 seconds, which is the same as the opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second openings. That is, the opening mode of the big winning opening 540 is the same for the special probability variable and special normal, and the small win (twice open (1) and (2)) until the second opening of the big winning opening 540 is completed. set. In this way, the special variable probability and the special normal jackpot game open and close the big winning port 540 in a predetermined opening and closing mode (pseudo small winning opening and closing mode) that looks like a small winning game in the first and second openings of the first round. It is what makes

In the small wins (twice opening (1) and (2)), the winning end intervals after the second big winning opening 540 is opened are set to be different from each other. Specifically, in double opening (1), the winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 for the second time is set to 1.0 seconds. In addition, in double opening (2), the winning end interval after the opening of the big winning opening 540 for the second time is set to 5.0 seconds.

In addition, the interval between opening between the second opening and the third opening in the special variable probability and the special normal, and the small winning end interval in the second opening (2) among the small winnings are the same number of seconds. (5.0 seconds). That is, the opening mode of the special winning prize opening 540 is set to be the same for the special probability variation, the special normal, and the small winning double opening (2) until the third opening of the special winning prize opening 540 is started. In other words, the special probability variation and special normal jackpot games are found to be jackpot games after the third release of the first round. In this way, the special variable probability and the special normal big win game are operated in the pseudo small win opening/closing mode, and then the big winning opening 540 is opened and closed in a specific opening/closing mode (opening/closing mode after the big win is found) in which the big win game is found. It is what makes

Similarly, the number of seconds the big winning opening 540 is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds when the type of the big hit is the actual low ball probability variable and the actual low ball probability normal, and when it is a small win (open twice The opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second openings of (1) and (2) are set to the same 0.896 seconds. That is, the actual low ball probability change, the actual low ball output normal, and the small hit (open twice (1) and (2)) mean that the big winning hole 540 are set to be the same.

In addition, the inter-round interval between the opening of the second round and the opening of the third round in the real low ball probability change and the real low ball normal, and the small hit end interval in the second round (2) of the small hits and are set to the same number of seconds (5.0 seconds). That is, the actual low ball probability change, the actual low ball output normal, and the opening of the small prize twice (2) mean that the opening mode of the big winning hole 540 is maintained until the third opening of the big winning hole 540 is started. set to be the same. In this way, the big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening and closing mode (pseudo small winning opening and closing mode) that looks like a small winning game in the opening of the first and second rounds of the real small winning ball probability change and the real small winning ball normal jackpot game. is opened and closed.

[Game flow]
The game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game progresses while repeating transitions to appropriate game states at predetermined timings. Here, each corresponding effect mode is set for each of the game states. Various effects are set in the effect mode. That is, when the game is started, the game state is shifted to an appropriate game state, and the effect of the effect mode corresponding to the shifted game state is performed. In this embodiment, production modes 1 to 6 are mainly provided as production modes.

As shown in FIG. 7, at the start of the game, in many cases, the game state is the normal game state (non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state). Further, when the game is in the normal game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed as the effect mode (step S900). The transition from the normal game state to another game state is mainly triggered by the result of the hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 . Exceptionally, for example, if there is suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol when the electric support state ends 100 times, the hit determination of the second special symbol in the normal game state is the maximum number of times of suspension. This is done up to 4 times, and if the judgment results in a big hit, the state will shift to the electric support state, but since it is a rare case, it is omitted from this drawing. It should be noted that although the electric support state has ended in the above 4 times, if a big hit occurs at that time, it is possible to return to the electric support state, so it is a normal game state and the second special symbol A special performance mode different from the performance mode 1 may be used to give the player a feeling of anticipation while the hit determination is being performed.

It should be noted that, in the normal game state, the big hit determination is performed by starting winning of the first starting port 5442 by so-called left-handed hitting. Also, when the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 is a big hit and the game state shifts to the time saving (electrical sapo) state, so-called right hitting is performed. In this way, while the time saving (electric sapo) state continues, the big hit determination is performed by the start winning prize of the second start port 440. - 特許庁In addition, although the result of the jackpot determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 was a big hit, if the game state did not shift to the time saving (electrical support) state (the game state is a non-time saving (non-electrical support) state ), left-handed batting continues.

When the game state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state and the production of production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) big hit When it becomes -1, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the probability variable state/time saving (electric support) state. In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 2 is started (steps S901, S902). In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the number of times of ST is set to 100 times, and the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 1 to 3, the game state shifts to the probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S910, S911). That is, the game state after the transition is the same as the game state before the transition. In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the number of times of ST is set to 100 times, and the number of times of time saving is set to continue (maximum 100 times) during the variable probability state.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 1 to 3, the game state shifts again to the probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S912, S911). In addition, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued with the transition of the game state. In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of ST and the number of times of shortening of working hours counted until reaching the jackpot are cleared. That is, the number of times of ST and the number of times of time saving are counted from 0.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 4 to 6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state described later (steps S913, S921). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice ( When it becomes 1) and (2)), the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number of times (100 times), the ST (variable probability state) and the time saving state are terminated, so the game state shifts to the normal game state. (Steps S914, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number of times are cleared. counting is resumed (steps S914 and S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S911 is a probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) is lost. , the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (variable probability state) and the time saving state are terminated, so the game state shifts to the normal game state. (Steps S916, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time reduction (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the number of times of ST and the number of times of time reduction are cleared count is restarted (steps S916 and S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit - When it becomes one of 4 to 6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S920, S921). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started. In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and production mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit -1 When it becomes either from 3, the game state shifts to the variable probability state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S922, S911). Further, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and production mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit -4 When it becomes one of 6 from to, the game state shifts again to the non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state (steps S923, S921). In addition, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued with the transition of the game state. In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S921 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and production mode 4 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (open twice (1 ) and (2)), the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the time saving state ends, so the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S924, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the time saving number of times is not cleared , counting is resumed (steps S924 and S925; No). That is, the production of the production mode 4 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S921 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) is lost. Then, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the time saving state ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S926, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the time saving number is not cleared , counting is resumed (steps S926 and S925; No). That is, the production of the production mode 4 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice ( When it becomes 1) and (2)), the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), while ST (probability change state) continues, the time saving state ends, so the probability change state/non-time saving ( The game state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S930, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time reduction (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the number of times of ST and the number of times of time reduction are cleared count is restarted (steps S930 and S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S902 is a probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) becomes a loss. , the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), ST (probability change state) continues, while the time saving state ends, so the probability change state/non-time saving ( The game state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S932, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo)) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number of times are cleared. Then, counting is restarted (steps S932, S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

Thus, when the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, ST (probability variable state) continues, while the time saving (electric sapo) state ends. That is, the player hits left-handed instead of right-handed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect in the effect mode 5 is set to have the same content as the effect in the effect mode 1. Thus, when the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, the player enters a game state (latency variable probability state) in which it is difficult to recognize that ST (variable probability state) continues. The effect of the effect mode 5 is the same as the effect of the effect mode 1, and may be performed by notifying the player that the latent probability variable state has been determined.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes either -1 or 2, the game state shifts to the variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state (steps S934, S911). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes -3, the game state shifts again to the probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state (steps S935, S933). In addition, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued with the transition of the game state. In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big win is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes either -4 or 5, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state (that is, normal game state) (steps S936, S900). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1) When the jackpot becomes -6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S937, S951). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 6 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of ST counted up to the big hit is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S933 is a probability variable state/non-time saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost. The game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times, the ST (variable probability state) ends, so the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S938, S939; Yes , S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number, the current game state (probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state) is maintained, the number of ST is not cleared, and the count is It is resumed (steps S938, S939; No). That is, the production of the production mode 5 is continued.

It should be noted that the predetermined number of times in step S939 is set according to what triggers the effect of the effect mode 5 that is currently being performed. Specifically, when the effect of the effect mode 5 currently being performed is started when the number of hit determinations reaches 50 times after the effect of the effect mode 2 is started (step S931; Yes ), the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 50 times (from the start of the effect in the effect mode 5). On the other hand, the effect of the effect mode 5 currently being performed has become the special figure (1) big hit -2 or 3 shown in step S960, or the special figure (1) big hit -3 shown in step S935. , the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 100 (from the start of the effect in the effect mode 5).

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the jackpot becomes -6, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state. In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 6 is started (steps S950, S951). In addition, in the game state in which the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When it becomes one of -1 to 3, the game state shifts to the probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S952, S911). In addition, along with the transition of this game state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When it becomes either from -4 to 6, the game state shifts to a non-probability variable state/time saving (electrical support) state (steps S953, S921). In addition, along with the transition of the game state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 4 is started. Along with the transition of this game state, the number of times of shortening the time counted until reaching the jackpot is cleared.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice When (1) and (2) are reached, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the time saving state ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S954, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state) is maintained, and the time saving number of times is not cleared , counting is resumed (steps S954 and S955; No). That is, the production of the production mode 6 is continued.

In addition, when the game state shown in step S951 is a non-probable variable state/time saving (electric sapo) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) is lost. Then, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), the time saving state ends, and the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S956, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current game state (non-variable state/time saving (electric sapo)) is maintained, and the time saving number of times is not cleared. Counting is restarted (steps S956, S955; No).

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the jackpot becomes -2 or 3, the game state shifts to the probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric support) state (steps S960, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 is started.

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state, and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the jackpot becomes -4 or -5, the game state shifts to the normal game state again. In addition, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued along with the transition of the game state (steps S970, S900).

In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability variable state/non-time-saving (non-electric sapo) state and the production of production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost. The normal game state is maintained. That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S980, S900).

In such a game flow, when the production mode 2 is started (step S902), the game state shifts to a variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state, so that the ST number is set to 100 times. be. Similarly, when the production mode 3 is started (step S911), the ST number is set to 100 times by shifting the game state to the variable probability state/time saving (electric sapo) state. Thus, after the production mode 2 or 3 is started (that is, after the ST is started), for example, if the result of the hit determination is a small hit, (in principle) the current game state is maintained after the small win game ends. , the ST count is not cleared and the count is restarted. Thus, the production of the production mode 2 or 3 is continued.

Here, as described above, when the small winning game is started, the big winning opening 540 is opened twice so that one game ball wins per opening. That is, when production mode 2 or 3 is started (when ST is started), for example, until the number of hit determinations reaches a predetermined number and the production mode ends (until ST ends) between), the small winning game can be played repeatedly. In this way, when the small winning game is repeated, it is possible to obtain prize balls by the small winning game and increase the number of game balls in the player's hand.

In the following, the ST in which prize balls can be obtained by a small winning game and the number of game balls at the player's hand can be increased is referred to as a super variable state. In addition, after the super-probability state is reached, a game in which prize balls are obtained by a small winning game to increase the number of game balls in the player's hand is called a rush (RUSH). That is, the rush (per one time) shall continue from the big hit that triggered the transition to the super-probable state until the next big hit or the end of the time-saving state. Thus, in the present embodiment, a game in which the time-saving state ends (for example, a game of 100 times or 50 times of hit determination, which will be described later) becomes a rush end condition.

In addition, after the production mode 2 is started, if the production mode 3 is started by any one of the special figures (2) jackpot -1 to 3, the game state before and after the jackpot is also in a super variable state. Therefore, it is assumed that the super-probable variable state continues. In such a case, it is assumed that rushes were performed consecutively (the second rush was performed).

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the super-probability state is reached, the obtained balls are displayed. A detailed description of the displayed balls will be given later.

[Description of the operation of the main control circuit]
Processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described below.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing. In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs backup restoration processing, initialization setting processing, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random number counter, the effect condition selection random number counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 and an opening time timer for the big winning opening 540 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the first start switch 5472 or the second start switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. processing, etc. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. Details of this processing will be described later.

In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the pass gate switch 49a, and performs processing such as storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs symbol display device control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 displays the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 according to the determination result of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processing in steps S13 and S14. , and the normal symbol display unit 71 are stored in the main RAM 103 with a control signal for driving the symbol display unit 71 . The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 and the normal symbol display portion 71 . Thus, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays and stops the special symbols based on the received control signal. In addition, the normal symbol display unit 71 normally displays the symbols in a variable and stationary manner based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (eg, the calling device, the hall computer, etc.). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the big winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second starting opening 440 (normal electric accessory 460). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs payout processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 allows the game balls to enter various winning ports (specifically, the big winning port 540, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440, and the general winning ports 53, 54, 450). It is determined whether or not When the main CPU 101 determines that a game ball has won a prize in any of the winning holes, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the prize to the payout/emission control circuit 300 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again, and repeats the processes from step S11 to step S19.

[System timer interrupt processing]
The system timer interrupt processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described below with reference to FIG.
The system timer interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the main processing at predetermined intervals even while the main processing is being performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs register save processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the running program stored in the register. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S21.

In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the big-hit determination random number counter, the big-hit symbol determination random number counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 101 performs switch input processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 operates various switches (specifically, the first starting switch 5472, the second starting switch 441, the passage gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, and 451). etc.) (that is, the presence or absence of detection of game balls in various switches). The main CPU 101 transmits a command to the sub-control circuit 200 when it determines that a game ball has been detected in any of various switches (when a game ball has won in any of various winning holes). . For example, when the count switch 541 counts (detects) game balls, the main CPU 101 transmits a big winning opening winning command to the sub-control circuit 200 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S23. Details of this processing will be described later.

In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs register return processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 restores the saved program to the register. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol control process]
The subroutine (special symbol control process) performed in step S13 of FIG. 9 will be described below with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 11, numerical values written beside steps S101 to S108 indicate control state flags corresponding to these steps. Here, the control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any of the processes from step S101 to step S108. The numerical value is stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103 .

In step S100, the main CPU 101 loads the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S101.

Note that in steps S101 to S108 described later, the main CPU 101 executes steps corresponding to the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103 . More specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag, and depending on the determination result, performs each step at a predetermined timing set for each step. Perform the processing in the step. As a result, the specific symbol game is progressed. The predetermined timing is determined according to a waiting time timer or the like. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without performing the processing in each step, and performs another subroutine. In addition to this subroutine, the main CPU 101 also performs system timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 10 at predetermined intervals.

In step S101, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage check processing. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S102.

In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 changes the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management when the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the variation time has elapsed. , and set the waiting time after determination (eg, 600 ms) to the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 sets to perform the processing of step S103 after the post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S103.

In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol display time management processing. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time has elapsed after confirmation, the result of the hit determination is a hit (big win or small win). It is determined whether or not. When the result of the win determination is a win, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating win start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the win start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S104 after the time corresponding to the winning start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the result of the hit determination is a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to execute the process of step S108. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S104.

In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs winning start interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a signal for opening the big winning opening 540 when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating winning start interval management and the time corresponding to the winning start interval has passed. , to the big winning opening solenoid 620 . As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 540 .

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (04H) indicating that the big winning opening is open, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) as a big winning opening opening time timer. set to That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S105. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S105.

In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 increments the counter for the number of openings of the large winning opening when the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management for reopening the large winning opening and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The memory is updated so as to increase by "1". The main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (04H) indicating that the big winning hole is open. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) to the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S106. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S106.

In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 101 sets the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, and the opening upper limit time has passed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0" is satisfied. The main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is greater than or equal to the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (it is the final round) is met. If it is the final round, the main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval to the control state flag, and if it is not the final round, sets a value (05H) indicating waiting time management for reopening the big winning opening. Set the control state flag. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S107.

In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs winning end interval processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval and the time corresponding to the winning end interval has elapsed. Set the status flags. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S108. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S108.

In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S101. The details of this processing will be described later. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to proceed with the special symbol game. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00H", "01H", "02H", and "07H" when the result of the hit determination is "loss" when the game state is not a big win or a small win game state. By setting them in order, the processes of steps S101, S102, S103, and S108 shown in FIG. 11 are performed at predetermined timings. Further, when the game state is not a big win or a small win game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H" when the result of the win determination is a big win or a small win. By setting in order, the processing of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S104 shown in FIG. 11 is performed at a predetermined timing, and control to the big hit or small hit game state is performed. Further, when the control to the big win or small win game state is performed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "04H" and "05H" in order, so that step S105 and step S106 shown in FIG. is performed at a predetermined timing to play a big win or a small win game. In addition, when the condition for ending the big win or small win game is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "04H", "06H", and "07H" in order, so that step S105 shown in FIG. The processing of steps S107 and S108 is performed at a predetermined timing, and the big win or small win game is finished.

[Special symbol memory check process]
Below, the subroutine (special symbol storage check process) performed in step S101 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S110, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag has a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to step S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag does not indicate the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is start memory. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is no start memory for the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory If the data (random number value for hit determination) is not stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is starting memory (more specifically, starting memory corresponding to at least one of the first and second special symbols), the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs demonstration display processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 sets a value that permits the execution of the demonstration display as the demonstration display permission value when the state where the start memory of the special symbol game becomes 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Then, the main CPU 101 sets a demonstration display command when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value. A demonstration display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, a demonstration display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is zero. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. That is, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S115. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not 0, that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If so, the process proceeds to step S114.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is changed as a change state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating the variation of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 as the variation state number. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 stores each of the data in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. Further, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 stores each of the data in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) to the second special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S118.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs big hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the high probability flag, and selects one hit determination table from a plurality of hit determination tables having different numbers of determination values for a big hit (big hit determination values) based on the read high probability flag. do. That is, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, a high probability hit (jackpot) determination table having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the high probability flag is not a predetermined value, a jackpot determination is performed. A normal hit (jackpot) determination table with a small value is referred to. Thus, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the game state is a high probability state (probability variable state), the probability of shifting to the jackpot game state is improved than normal.

Then, the main CPU 101 extracts at the time of starting winning, and the random value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). and the selected hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big win when the hit determination random number value and the big win determination value match. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that the game is not a big win (losing) when the hit determination random value and the big win determination value do not match. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to establish a big win game state advantageous to the player (big win determination) in the big win determination process. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S119.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs small hit determination processing. Incidentally, the small hit determination process is performed when the big hit is not determined in the big hit determination process in step S118. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the hit determination random value in the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the preset It is determined whether or not the small hit determination value matches. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small win when the random value for winning determination and the small winning determination value match. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small win (losing) when the random value for winning determination and the small winning determination value do not match. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to enter the small-hit game state (small-hit determination) in the small-hit determination process.

In this embodiment, as a hit determination table to be referenced with the hit determination random number value stored in the first special symbol start storage area, two types of normal use and high probability use (probability variation use) are prepared, As a hit determination table to be referenced with the hit determination random number value stored in the second special symbol start storage area, two types of normal use and high probability use (probability variation) are prepared, and a total of four types of hit determination are prepared. A table is provided. The two types of normal hit determination tables have the same jackpot probability, and the two types of high probability hit determination tables have the same jackpot probability. On the other hand, the number of small hit determination values in the hit determination table for normal use and the hit determination table for high probability (for probability variation), which is referred to as the hit determination random value stored in the first special symbol start storage area. are the same. In addition, the number of small hit determination values in the hit determination table for normal use and the hit determination table for high probability (variable probability), which is referred to as the hit determination random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area, is the same. is. In this way, the main CPU 101 is provided with the condition that the game ball has passed through the starting area (the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440). A first winning game state, a second winning game state in which a small amount of game balls can be obtained compared to the first winning game state, and a third winning game state in which game balls equivalent to the second winning game state can be obtained. It is an example of a hit determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a game state.

It should be noted that the small hit probability due to winning to the first starting port 5442 of the normal game may be larger or smaller than the small hitting probability due to winning to the second starting port 440 . The jackpot probability by winning the first starting port 5442 in the normal game may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability by winning the second starting port 440 .

In this way, by the processing of steps S118 and S119, any one of a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is determined as a result of the hit determination for the special symbol game. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S120.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol determination processing. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines a big win pattern when the result of the hit determination is a big win, determines a small win pattern when the result of the hit determination is a small win, and determines neither a big win nor a small win. That is, in the case of losing, a losing pattern is determined. The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S121.

In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern for determining a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of step S120 and the hit determination result determined in the process of steps S118 and S119. Select a table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (selects) a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 101 stores the selected variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 determines the variable display mode of the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 based on the data indicating such variation patterns.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied to the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 . As a result, the special symbols are variably displayed in the determined variation pattern in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 . In addition, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special figure variation pattern designation command. Thereby, by the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the effect display corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern designation command is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S122.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S123.

In step S<b>123 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103 . A special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . The sub-control circuit 200 starts an effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S124.

In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variable display. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol determination process]
The subroutine (special symbol determination process) performed in step S120 of FIG. 12 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big-hit determination is not a big-hit, the process proceeds to step S156.

In step S151, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the variation state number is (01H). When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to step S152. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is not (01H), the process proceeds to step S154.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of determining the first special symbol as the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random number extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S153.

In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big-hit symbol data and the big-hit symbol command of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the first special symbol display section 73 . The first special symbol display unit 73 variably displays the first special symbol and stops and displays the first special symbol in a mode based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the first special symbol jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of determining the second special symbol big-hit symbol based on the big-hit symbol determination random number extracted from the big-hit symbol determination counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the second special symbol jackpot symbol and the command of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the second special symbol jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display section 74 . The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a second special symbol jackpot symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is a small win, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S160. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S164.

In step S160, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a small winning symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of determining the second special symbol as the small winning symbol based on the random number value extracted from the big winning symbol determining counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S161.

In step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the small winning symbol of the second special symbol and the command of the small winning symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the second special symbol small winning symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display section 74 . The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the small winning symbol of the second special symbol. In addition, the main CPU 101 sets a command for a small winning symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. . As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the small hit stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting winning start interval display time data corresponding to winning symbols (big winning symbols, small winning symbols). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the winning start interval display time data corresponding to the winning symbols (big winning symbols, small winning symbols) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data relating to the number of openings of the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data related to the number of openings of the big winning openings in the main RAM 103 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S164, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the missing symbol and the command of the missing symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the missing symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and displays the first special symbol display section according to whether the changing special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. The first special symbol display part 73 or the second special symbol display part 74 variably displays the special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the missing symbol of the special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a command for a missing symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification pattern is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 in a display mode in which there is no loss. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) performed in step S102 of FIG. 11 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to step S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it ends this subroutine.

In step S202, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S203.

In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a symbol stop command. Symbol stop command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stoppage. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S204.

In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time after determination. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol display time management process]
Below, the subroutine (special symbol display time management process) performed in step S103 of FIG. 11 is demonstrated using FIG.15 and FIG.16.

In step S300, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management processing. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to step S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S302. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S302, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big win determination is not a big win, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S<b>303 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag of the main RAM 103 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

At step S304, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination at step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S311. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big-hit determination is not a big-hit, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S325. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S306.

In step S<b>306 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving number counter in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S307.

In step S307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S308. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S325.

In step S<b>308 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction count flag of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S309.

In step S<b>309 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a time saving end command in the main RAM 103 . The time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the time-saving end. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

In step S325, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S310. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S<b>326 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S327.

In step S327, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S328. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S310.

In step S<b>328 , the main CPU 101 clears the ST count flag of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S329.

In step S<b>329 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an ST end command in the main RAM 103 . The ST end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize the end of ST. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

In step S310, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is a small win, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S315.

In step S311, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (03H) indicating the winning interval management process. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S312.

In step S312, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a winning start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the winning start interval time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S313. In addition, the hit start interval time is also determined for each type of hit, but in the present embodiment, at least special probability variation, special normal, real ball output low probability variation, real ball output low normal and special figure (2) small hit -2 The winning start interval time is set to be the same or to a time (for example, 1 second) that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In step S313, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. A special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes that the special symbol effect has been stopped. When this process is finished, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S314.

In step S314, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big win start command or a small win start command corresponding to the special symbol. A big-hit start command or a small-hit start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the start of a big hit or a small hit. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S315, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a value (07H) indicating special symbol game end processing as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S316.

In step S316, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. A special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes that the special symbol effect has been stopped. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit start interval management process]
The subroutine (hit start interval management process) performed in step S104 of FIG. 11 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S401, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the winning start interval management processing. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the win start interval management process, the process proceeds to step S402. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the win start interval management process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

At step S402, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S403. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it ends this subroutine.

In step S<b>403 , the main CPU 101 sets the upper limit value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening in the main RAM 103 .

In step S<b>404 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S405.

In step S405, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an opening/closing pattern for each round or a small win according to the type of the big win symbol. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S406.

In step S<b>406 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . In this case, the display command during opening of the big winning opening becomes data indicating the first round. The display command during opening of the large winning opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a command during opening of the large winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S407.

In step S407, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (04H) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S408.

In step S<b>408 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the big winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S409.

In step S<b>409 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S410.

In step S<b>410 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the big winning opening 540 . The variables stored in this manner drive the large winning opening solenoid 620 to open the large winning opening 540 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Big Winning Gate Reopen Wait Time Management Processing]
Below, the subroutine (large winning opening re-open waiting time management process) performed in step S105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S500, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag has a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to step S501. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the big winning opening re-opening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S501, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S502. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it ends this subroutine.

In step S<b>502 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter for the number of openings of the big winning opening of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S503.

In step S<b>503 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . In this case, the display command during the opening of the big winning opening becomes data indicating the second round and the subsequent rounds. The display command data during opening of the big winning opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . The command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to increase the round counter by one. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S504.

In step S504, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (04H) indicating the processing for opening the big winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S505.

In step S505, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the big hit determination in step S118 is a big hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S506. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big-hit determination is not a big-hit, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S<b>506 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the big winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S507.

In step S<b>507 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening in the main RAM 103 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S508.

In step S<b>508 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Grand Prize Opening Processing]
Below, the subroutine (large winning opening opening process) performed in step S106 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S600, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process, the process proceeds to step S601. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S601, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the big winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "10", the process proceeds to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the big winning opening winning counter is not equal to or greater than "10", the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, the main CPU 101 performs a big winning opening opening/closing process according to the set opening/closing pattern for each round or small win. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the process of opening and closing the big winning opening 540 according to the opening/closing pattern for each round or for the small win set in step S405. Specifically, a process of opening and closing the big winning opening 540 a plurality of times during a predetermined round by repeating the process of waiting for time and closing and opening the big winning opening 540 every round or according to the opening/closing pattern of the small win. I do. If this process has ended, the process moves to step S603.

Here, in this embodiment, the special probability variation, the interval time between the first opening and the second opening of the first round of the special normal, the first opening and the second opening of the special figure (2) small hit -2 The interval time between openings is the same or is set to a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds). That is, in the process of step S602, special odds, special normal, special figure (2) small hit -2 is "0.896 seconds open time → 0.1 seconds open interval time → 0.896 seconds open will be executed in the order of time. Also, although it is not processed in this step but set in step S607, the interval time between the rounds of the first round and the second round of the actual low ball probability change and the real low ball output normal is the same or By setting a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds), "open time of the first round of 0.896 seconds → interval time between rounds of 0.1 seconds → 2 rounds of 0.896 seconds eye open time”. As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the types of winnings based on the time period during which the big winning opening 540 is closed.

In step S603, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time timer is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process moves to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", it ends this subroutine.

In step S604, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting big winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the big winning opening 540 . The variables stored in this manner will cause the grand prize opening solenoid 620 to be in a closed state. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S605.

In step S605, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is a small win, the process proceeds to step S610. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small win determination is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the count value of the number of opening times of the large winning opening is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of opening times of the large winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the count value of the number of opening times of the big winning prize stored in the main RAM 103 with the upper limit number of opening times of the big winning prize or more. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the upper limit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the opening number of winning openings, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S610. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is not equal to or greater than the upper limit of the opening number of winning openings, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the open time interval display time in the main RAM 103. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S608.

In step S608, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (05H) indicative of waiting time management for reopening the big winning opening. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S609.

In step S<b>609 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S610, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the winning end interval display time in the main RAM 103. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S611.

In step S611, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S612.

In step S<b>612 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol per interval end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, a big win end display command is set, and when the result of the hit determination is a small win, a small win end display command is set. The big hit end display command and the small win end display command are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (hit end interval process) executed in step S107 of FIG. 11 will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step S700, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process, the process proceeds to step S701. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S701, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval process, the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the waiting time timer (t) corresponding to the winning end interval is "0". or not. If the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S702, and if the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", ends this subroutine.

In step S702, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 103 to the control state flag. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S703.

In step S<b>703 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting control data corresponding to the big win symbols or small win symbols and the gaming state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 . Specifically, as the control data, game states such as a normal game state and a variable probability state are set. Also, the main CPU 101 sends an end command to the sub-control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

[Special symbol game end processing]
The subroutine (special symbol game ending process) executed in step S108 of FIG. 11 will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step S710, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07H) indicating special symbol game end processing. When it is determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is shifted to step S711. If it is not determined that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S711, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this processing ends, this subroutine ends.

[Description of sub-control circuit operation]
The processing of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described below. The sub-control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100 and performs various processing such as display processing by the sub-CPU 201 .

[Sub-control main processing]
First, sub-control main processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1101, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 initializes the work area of the work RAM 203 upon power-on. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1102.

In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates random numbers stored in the work RAM 203 (for example, random numbers for determining the effect, random numbers for determining the jackpot effect, random numbers for determining stop symbols, etc.). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1103.

In step S1103, the sub CPU 201 performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes commands stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203 . The details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1104.

In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 performs effect control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the effect using the effect button 62 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1105.

In step S1105, the sub CPU 201 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to the display control circuit 204 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1106.

In the display control circuit 204, when data is received from the sub CPU 201, the VDP of the display control circuit 204 generates various data such as identification pattern data, background image data, and effect image data based on the received data. image data is read out from the image data ROM. The VDP superimposes various image data read out from the image data ROM and displays them in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 performs sound/lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the sound generated from the speaker 24 and controls the light emission of various lamps such as the lamp 25 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1107.

In step S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs role product control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the operation (mechanical operation and lighting operation) of the movable accessory unit 57 via the accessory control circuit 207 . The control of the operation of the movable accessory unit 57 performed by the sub CPU 201 includes the control of the operation of the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83. is included. When this process is completed, the process moves to the random value update process in step S1102 again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 21 is being performed, there are cases where the sub-control main process is interrupted and the timer interrupt process is performed. Timer interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving registers. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the values used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1202.

In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 performs timer update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the timer stored in the work RAM 203 . Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates a timer such as a round effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1203.

In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 performs effect button switch input detection processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 detects whether or not the effect button switch 310 is input by operating the effect button 62 . When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1204.

In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the values saved in step S201 to each register. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 21 is being executed, there are cases where the sub-control main processing is interrupted and command interrupt processing is performed. Command interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving registers. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the values used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 201 stores the received command in the buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1303.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the values saved in step S1301 to each register. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command analysis processing]
The subroutine (command analysis processing) performed in step S1103 of FIG. 21 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG.

In step S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command, the process moves to step S1402. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no received command, it ends this subroutine.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 201 reads the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads commands stored in the receive buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1403.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special winning opening winning command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the big winning opening winning command, the process moves to step S1404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the special winning opening winning command, the process proceeds to step S1405.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the winning number counter and the total winning number counter during the big hit. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can acquire data relating to the number of prize balls won by the player by winning the game ball into the big prize opening 540 (the number of winning game balls). It should be noted that the winning number counter and the total winning number counter during the big win start counting (counting) with the start of the big win game as a delimiter. In this way, data on the number of winning balls is obtained each time a big win or a small win is made. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a special symbol specifying command, the process moves to step S1406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the special symbol specifying command, the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a stop symbol based on the special symbol designation command. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1408. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1409.

In step S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining the effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, the stop symbol and the extracted random number for determining effect. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a winning start command (big winning start command, small winning start command). In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a winning start command (big winning starting command, small winning starting command), the process proceeds to step S1410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a winning start command (a big winning start command, a small winning start command), the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a jackpot start effect. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is an effect display command during opening of the big winning opening. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the effect display command during opening of the big winning opening, the process proceeds to step S1412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the effect display command during opening of the big winning opening, the process proceeds to step S1413.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect during the opening of the big winning opening. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is an inter-round display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the inter-round display command, the process proceeds to step S1414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the inter-round display command, the process proceeds to step S1415.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining effects between rounds. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1415, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a winning end display command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the winning end display command, the process proceeds to step S1416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the winning end display command, the process proceeds to step S1417.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect at the end of the big hit. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1417, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a time saving end command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is the time saving end command, the process proceeds to step S1418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not the time saving end command, the process proceeds to step S1419.

In step S1418, the sub CPU 201 performs control such as clearing the time saving flag and ending the time saving display. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1419, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to the received other command. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

Note that the effect pattern determination process in step S1408, the winning start effect determination process in step S1410, the inter-round effect determination process in step S1414, and the winning end effect determination process in step S1416 are the pachinko game according to the second embodiment, which will be described later. Details are given in the game description.

<Pachinko machine according to the second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko game machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 91. FIG. Components identical or similar to those in the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

[game board]
First, the game board 17 used in the second embodiment will be described.

The game board 17 used in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is another example of the game board 17 shown in FIG. The game board 17 shown in FIG. 26 is largely different from the game board 17 shown in FIG. and the point that the starting port unit 7070 (the starting port 7071a and the base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b (first starting port)) is provided, and the movable accessory unit 57 (first movable accessory unit (production device 2400) , a first movable accessory unit 6000 and a second movable accessory unit 8000 are provided instead of the second movable accessory unit 82 and the third movable accessory unit 83). A detailed description of the configurations of the center accessory 7000, the starting unit 7070, the first movable accessory unit 6000, and the second movable accessory unit 8000 will be given later.

[Description of the operation of the main control circuit]
Processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) in the second embodiment will be described below.

In the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the second embodiment, the major difference from the processing in the first embodiment is mainly the main processing.

[Main processing]
Main processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing. In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs backup restoration processing, initialization setting processing, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random number counter, the effect condition selection random number counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201, an opening time timer for the big winning opening 540, and an opening time timer for a communication hole 7031, which will be described later. conduct. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S7000.

In step S7000, the main CPU 101 performs sorting device control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for energizing the solenoid 7250 based on the open time timer of the communication hole 7031 . Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the first start switch 5472 or the second start switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. processing, etc. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. Details of this processing will be described later.

In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the pass gate switch 49a, and performs processing such as storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs symbol display device control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 displays the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 according to the determination result of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processing in steps S13 and S14. , and the normal symbol display unit 71 are stored in the main RAM 103 with a control signal for driving the symbol display unit 71 . The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 and the normal symbol display portion 71 . Thus, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays and stops the special symbols based on the received control signal. In addition, the normal symbol display unit 71 normally displays the symbols in a variable and stationary manner based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (eg, the calling device, the hall computer, etc.). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the big winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second starting opening 440 (normal electric accessory 460). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs payout processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 allows the game balls to enter various winning ports (specifically, the big winning port 540, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440, and the general winning ports 53, 54, 450). It is determined whether or not When the main CPU 101 determines that a game ball has won a prize in any of the winning holes, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the prize to the payout/emission control circuit 300 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S7001.

In step S7001, the main CPU 101 performs fraud detection processing. A detailed description of the fraud detection process will be given later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again, and repeats the processes from step S11 to step S19.

Thus, in the main process in the second embodiment, unlike the main process in the first embodiment, between the timer update process shown in step S12 and the special symbol control process shown in step S13, shown in step S7000 A sorting device control process is performed.

[Sorting device control process]
Below, the subroutine (distribution apparatus control process) performed in FIG.27 S7000 is demonstrated using FIG.

In step S7010, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the solenoid 7250 is in an energized state (excited state). When the main CPU 101 determines that the solenoid 7250 is energized ("YES" in step S7010), the process proceeds to step S7013. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the solenoid 7250 is not energized ("NO" in step S7010), the process proceeds to step S7011.

In step S7011, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the open time timer for the communication hole 7031 is open timing. Here, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is set so that the opening timing of 0.5 seconds and the closing timing of 1.5 seconds are always alternately repeated. When the main CPU 101 determines that the open time timer for the communication hole 7031 has reached the opening timing ("YES" in step S7011), the process proceeds to step S7012. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is not the opening timing (that is, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the closing timing) ("NO" in step S7011), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. do.

In step S7012, the main CPU 101 performs solenoid excitation processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for energizing the solenoid 7250 . As a result, the solenoid 7250 is energized (excited). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S7013, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the open time timer of the communication hole 7031 is closing timing. When the main CPU 101 determines that the open time timer for the communication hole 7031 is closing timing ("YES" in step S7013), the process proceeds to step S7014. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is not the closing timing (that is, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the opening timing) ("NO" in step S7013), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. do.

In step S7014, the main CPU 101 performs solenoid excitation stop processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 stops outputting the control signal for energizing the solenoid 7250 . As a result, the solenoid 7250 is brought into a non-energized state (non-excited state). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. In this embodiment, the process of periodically energizing/de-energizing the solenoid 7250 is performed in the main process of FIG. 27, but it may be performed in the system timer interrupt process of FIG. In that case, the count timer is updated for each timer interrupt, and when the value of the count timer satisfies a predetermined condition (exceeds a predetermined value, for example), the distribution device control process of FIG. 28 is executed in the interrupt process. and initialize the count timer after executing the process.

[Center accessory and starting unit]
The configurations of the center accessory 7000 and the starter unit 7070 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 29 to 53. FIG.

First, the configuration of the center accessory 7000 will be described in detail.

The center accessory 7000 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area 20 to the first starting port of the starting port unit 7070 via the warp passage 7020 and the like, as will be described later. can. Although details will be described later, the first starting port of the starting port unit 7070 corresponds to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment, and two (specifically, , a base plate side forward path 7072b and a starting port 7071a) are provided. The center accessory 7000 includes a ball entrance 7010, a warp passage 7020, a croon 7100, an upper passage 7030, a game ball sorting device 7200, a stage 7040, a reverse ball passage 7050 and a central gutter 7060.

First, the outline of the rolling path of the game ball guided to the starting port unit 7070 by the center accessory 7000 will be described.

In this embodiment, the rolling path of the game ball guided by the center accessory 7000 is provided with two types of rolling paths (“advantageous course” and “unfavorable course”). The advantageous course and the disadvantageous course are set so that the degrees of advantage for the player are different from each other when the game ball passes through. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the advantageous course, the degree of advantage for the player is set to be higher than when the game ball passes through the disadvantageous course. A game ball distribution device 7200 distributes the advantageous course and the disadvantageous course through which the game ball passes.

When the shooting handle 32 is operated to hit left, the shot game ball flows down the game area 20 on the left side of the center accessory 7000, and part of the flowing game ball enters the ball entrance 7010. to ball A game ball entered into the ball entrance 7010 passes through the warp passage 7020, the croon 7100, and the upper passage 7030 in order.

Then, the game balls passing through the upper passage 7030 are sorted into advantageous courses or disadvantageous courses by the game ball sorting device 7200 in the middle of the upper passage 7030 . The game ball distributed to the disadvantageous course passes through the upper passage 7030 as it is, and is then guided from the stage 7040 toward the starting port unit 7070. - 特許庁On the other hand, in the middle of the upper passage 7030, the game balls distributed to the advantageous course by the game ball distribution device 7200 pass through the back ball passage 7050 and the central gutter 7060 in order, and are then guided toward the starting port unit 7070. be. A specific description of the rolling path of the game ball (the flow of the ball game ball) will be given later.

Next, details of the ball entrance 7010, warp passage 7020, croon 7100, upper passage 7030, game ball distribution device 7200, stage 7040, back ball passage 7050, and central gutter 7060 provided in the center accessory 7000. to explain.

A ball entrance 7010 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 is a portion configured to allow game balls to enter. The ball entrance 7010 is provided in the vicinity of the left end in the vertical middle of the center accessory 7000 . The ball entrance 7010 is provided in the left game area 20 of the liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, substantially in the center of the left game area 20 in the left-right direction). In this way, the ball inlet 7010 is configured such that when the shooting handle 32 is operated and left-handed, a part of the game ball flowing down the left game area 20 enters.

A warp passage 7020 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 is a passage for guiding a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 7010 to the lower right direction (a crew 7100 to be described later). One end (upper left end) of warp passage 7020 communicates with entrance 7010 . Warp passage 7020 is formed to extend rightward from entrance 7010 and then generally downward. The other end (lower end) of warp passage 7020 is formed to open rearward. An upstream passage 7021 and a downstream passage 7022 are formed in the warp passage 7020 .

An upstream passage 7021 shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 is a portion of the warp passage 7020 located on the upstream side (ball entrance 7010 side). The upstream passage 7021 is formed to extend in the left-right direction. The left end of the upstream passage 7021 communicates with the entrance 7010 . The front side surface of the upstream passage 7021 is fitted in a part of the game board 17 cut out, flush with the game area 20 and exposed forward. Thus, the front side surface of the upstream passage 7021 constitutes part of the game area 20 . Further, in the game area 20, not only the left side of the ball entrance 7010 but also the right side is configured so that the game ball can flow down. In addition, the portion of the upstream passage 7021 other than the front side surface (the portion behind the front side surface) is formed so as to be positioned behind the front side surface of the game board 17 , that is, behind the game area 20 . Also, the upstream passage 7021 is formed of a non-permeable member. In this way, when a game ball entering the ball entrance 7010 passes through the upstream passage 7021 of the warp passage 7020, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize it. Here, "invisible" means that visibility is lower than in other states, and may or may not include things that cannot be seen at all.

A downstream passage 7022 shown in FIGS. 30 and 32 is a portion of the warp passage 7020 located on the downstream side (Kroon 7100 side). The downstream passage 7022 is formed to extend vertically. The upper end of the downstream passage 7022 communicates with the lower end of the upstream passage 7021 . The downstream passage 7022 is formed to extend forward from a portion communicating with the upstream passage 7021, extend downward, and then bend rearward. In this way, the downstream passage 7022 is formed in a U-shape with its rear side open when viewed from the side. The front side surface of the downstream passage 7022 is formed so as to be positioned forward of the decoration applied to the front side surface of the center accessory 7000 . Also, the downstream passage 7022 is formed of a permeable member. Thus, when the game ball is guided from the upstream passage 7021 to the downstream passage 7022, the game ball passing through the downstream passage 7022 becomes visible to the player.

Due to such a configuration of the warp passage 7020, the game ball entering the ball entrance 7010 is once invisible to the player when passing through the upstream passage 7021, and then when passing through the downstream passage 7022. It becomes visible from the player. In this way, from the player's point of view, the game ball that has disappeared in the ball entrance 7010 suddenly appears and is guided to the croon 7100, giving the player the impression that the game ball entering the ball entrance 7010 has been warped. can.

The croon 7100 shown in FIGS. 29 to 36 is a passage for guiding game balls that have flowed in from the warp passage 7020 to the right (upper passage 7030, which will be described later). The croon 7100 can impart randomness to the passing (rolling) time of the game ball passing through the croon 7100 . A croon 7100 is provided rearwardly adjacent to the lower end of the warp passage 7020 . Thereby, the croon 7100 is configured to be able to receive a game ball that has passed through the warp passage 7020 . The croon 7100 includes a guide portion 7110 , a rolling portion 7120 and a stepped portion 7130 .

The guide portion 7110 shown in FIGS. 33 to 36 is a portion that guides game balls flowing in from the warp passage 7020 to the right (to a rolling portion 7120 described later). The guiding portion 7110 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction in a plan view, and is formed so that the left rear corner portion has a rounded shape (see FIG. 35). Guiding portion 7110 is provided such that its left end is positioned near the lower end of warp passage 7020 . The guiding part 7110 has an inlet 7111 , a bottom part 7112 and a side wall part 7113 .

The inflow port 7111 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is a hole (entrance) for guiding the game ball to the guiding portion 7110 . The inflow port 7111 is provided at a position facing the opening at the lower end of the warp passage 7020 (the left end of the guiding portion 7110) so that the front side of the guiding portion 7110 opens. The inflow port 7111 communicates with the lower end of the downstream passage 7022 of the warp passage 7020 . The inflow port 7111 is formed in a size through which a game ball can pass.

A bottom surface portion 7112 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 36 is a portion that constitutes the bottom portion of the guide portion 7110 . The bottom portion 7112 is configured so that a game ball can pass through its upper side surface. Further, the upper side surface of the bottom surface portion 7112 is formed so as to incline downward to the right. That is, the upper side surface of the bottom portion 7112 is formed into a shape capable of guiding the game ball to the right.

The side wall portion 7113 guides the game ball that has flowed in from the warp passage 7020 . The side wall portion 7113 is formed to rise from the end portion of the bottom portion 7112 . The sidewall portion 7113 includes a front sidewall portion 7113a and a rear sidewall portion 7113b.

The front wall portion 7113a shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is formed to rise from the front end portion of the bottom surface portion 7112. As shown in FIG. The front wall portion 7113 a is formed adjacent to the right side of the inlet 7111 . In other words, the inlet 7111 is formed so that the left end of the front wall portion 7113a opens. The front wall portion 7113a is formed so that the height from the bottom surface portion 7112 is constant.

The rear wall portion 7113b shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 36 is formed to rise from the rear end portion of the bottom surface portion 7112. As shown in FIG. More specifically, the rear wall portion 7113b is formed so as to rise from an end extending from the left front end to the right rear end of the bottom surface portion 7112 . The rear wall portion 7113b is provided at the front end thereof with the inlet 7111 separated from the front wall portion 7113a. The rear wall portion 7113b is formed so that the height from the bottom surface portion 7112 is constant.

The rolling part 7120 is a part configured so that the game ball that has flowed in from the guiding part 7110 can roll. The rolling part 7120 is formed in a substantially circular shape in plan view (see FIG. 35). The rolling part 7120 is provided adjacent to the right side of the guiding part 7110 . The rolling part 7120 includes a bottom part 7121 , a guide wall 7122 and a discharge part 7123 .

A bottom portion 7121 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 36 is a portion that constitutes the bottom portion of the rolling portion 7120 . The bottom surface portion 7121 is configured so that a game ball can roll on its upper surface. Also, the upper side surface of the bottom surface portion 7121 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward its center portion. That is, the upper side surface of the bottom portion 7121 is formed into a shape that can guide the game ball to the central portion. The bottom surface portion 7121 is formed to be lower than the bottom surface portion 7112 of the guide portion 7110 .

The guide wall 7122 guides the game ball so as to roll on the bottom portion 7121 . The guide wall 7122 is formed to rise from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom surface portion 7121 . The guide wall 7122 is formed in a substantially annular shape (substantially partially annular shape) in plan view. Specifically, in a plan view, the guide wall 7122 starts from the connecting portion (the right end of the rear wall portion 7113b) with the rear wall portion 7113b of the guiding portion 7110 and starts from the connecting portion (the front wall portion) with the front wall portion 7113a. The right end of 7113a) is formed in an annular shape. As a result, when the game ball that has flowed into the rolling portion 7120 rolls in contact with the guide wall 7122, the game ball is guided by the guide wall 7122 so as to follow a circular orbit in plan view.

The guide wall 7122 is formed with a swelling portion 7122a near its starting point (connecting portion with the rear wall portion 7113b) for buffering the collision between the game ball and the guide wall 7122. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 33 and 35, the swelling portion 7122a is formed so as to swell rearward from the rear wall portion 7113b in plan view. That is, the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 is basically formed to have the same shape as the outer peripheral surface of the bottom surface portion 7121 in plan view, whereas the bulging portion 7122a is wider than the outer peripheral surface of the bottom surface portion 7121 in plan view. It is formed so as to be positioned radially outward.

The discharge part 7123 is a part configured to discharge the game ball rolling on the rolling part 7120 to the outside. The discharge part 7123 is formed in the central part of the bottom part 7121 . The discharge part 7123 is formed to protrude downward from the bottom part 7121 . The discharge part 7123 is formed in an inverted conical shape whose diameter becomes smaller toward the bottom (see FIGS. 34 and 36). The discharge portion 7123 is formed with a discharge hole 7123a.

The discharge hole 7123 a is formed in the central portion of the discharge portion 7123 . The discharge hole 7123a is formed as an inverted conical hole whose diameter decreases downward (see FIGS. 34 and 36). The ejection hole 7123a is formed to have a size that allows the game ball to be ejected.

The stepped portion 7130 shown in FIGS. 33, 35, and 36 is provided at the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion 7112 of the guide portion 7110 and the bottom surface portion 7121 of the rolling portion 7120. This wall portion is formed by lowering the bottom surface portion 7121 of the rolling portion 7120 . The height of the step portion 7130 is formed so as to be equal to or less than the radius of the game ball (see FIG. 49). The stepped portion 7130 is formed from the end point of the guide wall 7122 (the connection portion with the front wall portion 7113a) to the start point of the guide wall 7122 (the connection portion with the rear wall portion 7113b). The stepped portion 7130 is formed in a partially annular shape concentrically and radially with the guide wall 7122 (the portion thereof excluding the bulging portion 7122a) in plan view. As a result, the game ball that rolls over the end point of the guide wall 7122 takes a circular trajectory that has been rolling up to that point, and takes substantially the same trajectory.

The upper passage 7030 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 and 41 is a passage for guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge hole 7123a of the croon 7100 to the right (back ball passage 7050). The upper passage 7030 is formed to extend generally rightward from below the croon 7100 . The left end of the upper passage 7030 communicates with the discharge hole 7123a of the cloon 7100 in the vertical direction. The upper passage 7030 is formed so as to incline downward to the right. A plurality of protrusions 7030a (two or three in this embodiment) are formed on the front and rear side walls of the upper passage 7030, respectively, protruding toward the center of the passage. The front and rear protruding portions 7030a are formed at positions shifted from each other in the front-rear direction (positions not facing each other). In this way, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 moves downstream while colliding with the projections 7030a on the front and rear sides. In this way, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 collides with the front and rear protrusions 7030a, thereby slowing the movement (rolling) speed and having randomness in the movement (rolling) time. It will happen. A communication hole 7031 is formed in the upper passage 7030 .

A communication hole 7031 shown in FIGS. 32 and 41 is an entrance for guiding a game ball to an "advantageous course" to be described later. The communication hole 7031 is formed so as to vertically penetrate the upper passage 7030 . The communication hole 7031 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The communication hole 7031 is formed in a size through which a game ball can pass. The communication hole 7031 is formed substantially in the center of the upper passage 7030 . More specifically, the communication hole 7031 is formed downstream of the front and rear protrusions 7030a.

Although the details will be described later, the communication hole 7031 is opened and closed at a predetermined timing by the movable piece 7220 of the game ball sorting device 7200 . When the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220 , the upper side surface of the movable piece 7220 forms part of the upper passage 7030 . Thus, when the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 reaches the right end (downstream end) from the left end through the movable piece 7220 concerned. On the other hand, when the communication hole 7031 is opened by the movable piece 7220, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 falls from the communication hole 7031 and does not reach the right end of the upper passage 7030.

In this way, game balls that have not fallen from the communication hole 7031 (that is, game balls that have reached the right end of the upper passage 7030) are distributed to unfavorable courses. On the other hand, game balls that have fallen from the communication hole 7031 (that is, game balls that have not reached the right end of the upper passage 7030) are distributed to advantageous courses.

A game ball distribution device 7200 shown in FIGS. 31, 32 and 37 to 41 distributes game balls flowing down the game area 20 to a plurality of paths. Specifically, the game ball distribution device 7200 (among the game balls flowing down the game area 20, entering from the ball entrance 7010) the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030, the advantageous course or disadvantageous course can be divided into In this way, the game ball distributed to the advantageous course passes through the advantageous course, and the first starting port of the starting port unit 7070 (more , the base plate side advantageous outward route 7072b) can be reliably won. On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the disadvantageous course, by passing through the disadvantageous course, the first starting port of the starting port unit 7070 (more 7071a) may be able to win (ie, it is uncertain whether to win). Also, in the present embodiment, in the two first starting ports, the winner of the base plate side advantageous outward route 7072b (when passing the advantageous course) is the starting port 7071a (when passing the disadvantageous course). It is set so that more prize balls can be obtained than when winning. Thus, when the game balls are distributed to the advantageous course, the degree of advantage for the player is set to be higher than when the game balls are distributed to the unfavorable course. The game ball distribution device 7200 is provided below the upper passage 7030 . The game ball distribution device 7200 includes a base portion 7210, a movable piece 7220, a flapper 7230, a metal piece 7240, a solenoid 7250 and a cover portion 7260.

For convenience of explanation, the base portion 7210 and the cover portion 7260 are omitted in FIG. 40, and the base portion 7210 is omitted in FIG.

The base portion 7210 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is a portion that constitutes the left portion of the shell of the game ball sorting device 7200. As shown in FIG. The base portion 7210 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open right side surface. The base part 7210 is fixed to the lower rear portion of the center accessory 7000 .

A movable piece 7220 shown in FIGS. 37 to 41 opens and closes the communication hole 7031 . Here, the state in which the communication hole 7031 is open means that the game ball can pass through the communication hole 7031 (the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 is opened to the extent that it falls from the communication hole 7031). refers to the state. In addition, the state in which the communication hole 7031 is closed means that the game ball cannot pass through the communication hole 7031 (the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 does not fall from the communication hole 7031). , and it is not limited to the case where the communication hole 7031 is completely closed. By opening the communication hole 7031 by the movable piece 7220, the game ball is guided to the "advantageous course". On the other hand, when the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031, the game ball is guided to the "unfavorable course". Details of the flow of game balls passing through the "advantageous course" and the "disadvantageous course" will be described later.

The movable piece 7220 is provided on the right side of the base portion 7210 . The movable piece 7220 has an upper movable piece 7221 and a lower movable piece 7222 . Note that the shape will be described below based on the state where the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031 .

A movable piece upper portion 7221 shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 constitutes an upper portion of the movable piece 7220 and is a portion for opening and closing the communication hole 7031 . The movable piece upper part 7221 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and is provided so that the longitudinal direction thereof faces the front-rear direction. The movable piece upper part 7221 is provided so as to be positioned immediately below the communication hole 7031 (so as to close the communication hole 7031).

A movable piece lower portion 7222 shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is a portion that constitutes the lower portion of the movable piece 7220 . The lower movable piece 7222 is formed integrally with the upper movable piece 7221 . The lower movable piece 7222 is formed to extend generally downward from the rear end of the upper movable piece 7221 . The movable piece lower portion 7222 is formed so as to bend forward and downward (in an oblique direction) at its middle portion. A through hole penetrating the lower movable piece 7222 in the left-right direction is formed in the middle portion of the lower movable piece 7222, and a first pin 7211 fixed to the base portion 7210 is inserted into the through hole. Thereby, the movable piece 7220 is supported by the base portion 7210 so as to be able to swing about the axis of the first pin 7211 . A long hole 7222a is formed in the movable piece lower portion 7222 .

The long hole 7222a is formed so as to pass through the lower portion of the movable piece lower portion 7222 in the left-right direction. The elongated hole 7222a is formed such that its longitudinal direction in a side view faces the extension direction of the movable piece lower portion 7222 (the oblique direction from the lower front to the upper rear).

A flapper 7230 shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is a member for transmitting driving force to the movable piece 7220. FIG. The flapper 7230 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape in plan view. The flapper 7230 is provided such that its longitudinal direction is generally oriented in the front-rear direction. A through hole is formed through the flapper 7230 in the left-right direction at the rear end portion of the flapper 7230, and a second pin 7212 fixed to the base portion 7210 is inserted into the through hole. The second pin 7212 is provided so as to be positioned behind and slightly below the first pin 7211 (behind a solenoid 7250 described later). Thereby, the flapper 7230 is supported by the base portion 7210 so as to be able to swing about the axis of the second pin 7212 . Flapper 7230 is housed inside base portion 7210 . A protrusion 7231 is formed on the flapper 7230 .

A protrusion 7231 shown in FIG. 41 is formed in a columnar shape protruding rightward from the front end of the flapper 7230 . The protrusion 7231 is inserted into the elongated hole 7222a of the movable piece 7220. As shown in FIG. The diameter of the protrusion 7231 is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the elongated hole 7222a in the lateral direction.

The front portion of the flapper 7230 configured in this manner tends to swing downward due to its own weight, but the protrusion 7231 contacts the lower end of the long hole 7222a, thereby limiting the swing width. At this time, the movable piece 7220 (the movable piece upper portion 7221 ) closes the communication hole 7031 .

A metal piece 7240 shown in FIGS. 39 to 41 is a member made of metal. The metal piece 7240 is formed by bending a plate into a substantially L shape. The metal piece 7240 has a flat portion 7241 and a flange portion 7242 .

The planar portion 7241 is a portion whose plate surface is generally directed in the vertical direction. The flat portion 7241 is provided above the flapper 7230 so that the upper surface of the flat portion 7241 is exposed. The flat portion 7241 is provided between the projection portion 7231 of the flapper 7230 and the second pin 7212 that is the swing center of the flapper 7230 .

The flange portion 7242 is a portion that is bent downward from the left end portion of the flat portion 7241 . The flange portion 7242 is formed so that the plate surface faces in the left-right direction. A through hole is formed in the flange portion 7242 , and a bolt inserted into the through hole is fastened to the flapper 7230 , thereby fixing the metal piece 7240 to the flapper 7230 .

The solenoid 7250 is for operating the movable piece 7220 by driving the flapper 7230 . Solenoid 7250 is housed inside base portion 7210 so as to be positioned above flat portion 7241 of metal piece 7240 . Solenoid 7250 is provided in non-contact with metal piece 7240 . When the solenoid 7250 is in an energized state (excited state), it generates an attracting force that attracts the metal piece 7240 . Solenoid 7250 is provided so that the attraction force is directed upward. When the solenoid 7250 is in a non-energized state (non-excited state), it stops generating the attracting force.

The flapper 7230, the metal piece 7240 and the solenoid 7250 configured in this manner constitute a flapper type solenoid.

The cover portion 7260 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is a portion that constitutes the right portion of the shell of the game ball sorting device 7200 . The cover part 7260 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open left side. A movable piece 7220 is accommodated inside the cover portion 7260 . The cover portion 7260 is combined with the base portion 7210 to form an outer shell of the game ball sorting device 7200 and also forms a housing space for housing the movable piece 7220 , the flapper 7230 , the metal piece 7240 and the solenoid 7250 .

A detailed description of the operation of the game ball sorting device 7200 will be given later.

The stage 7040 shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 rolls the game ball that has passed through the upper passage 7030 without falling from the communication hole 7031 so as to repeatedly reciprocate in the horizontal direction. Stage 7040 forms part of the "unfavorable course". The stage 7040 is provided in the lower front part of the upper passage 7030 and is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls flowing in from the upper passage 7030 . The stage 7040 is provided so that the extending direction faces the left-right direction. The bottom surface (rolling surface) of the stage 7040 is formed in a substantially bowl-like shape in which the height gradually increases toward the left and right ends when viewed from the front. That is, the stage 7040 is formed so as to guide the game ball to the left-right central portion.

Downstream ports 7041, 7042, and 7043 through which game balls flow down are provided so as to line up in the left-right direction at substantially the center of the stage 7040 . The middle flow-down port 7042 of the three flow-down ports 7041 , 7042 , and 7043 is formed just above the starting port 7071 a of the starting port unit 7070 . In this way, the game ball flowing down from the flow-down port 7042 is formed so as to easily enter the starting port 7071a of the starting port unit 7070, which will be described later. On the other hand, the right-side flow-down port 7041 and the left-side flow-down port 7043 are formed so that the game balls that flow down from the flow-down ports 7041 and 7043 flow downward as they are without entering the starting port 7071a.

The back ball passage 7050 shown in FIGS. 31, 32 and 37 is a passage for guiding the game ball dropped from the communication hole 7031 to the right (central gutter 7060). Backball path 7050 forms part of the advantageous course. Back ball passage 7050 is formed to extend rightward from below communication hole 7031 . The back ball passage 7050 is formed so as to incline downward to the right. The left end of the back ball passage 7050 communicates vertically with the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030 via the movable piece 7220 . The back ball passage 7050 is arranged on the rear side of the lower part of the center accessory 7000 . Thus, the game ball passing through the back ball passage 7050 is made invisible to the player. A notch 7051 is formed in the back ball passage 7050 .

A notch portion 7051 shown in FIG. 37 is formed by notching the bottom surface of the back ball passage 7050 . A notch portion 7051 is formed in the right front portion of the back ball passage 7050 . The notch 7051 is formed to have a size through which a game ball can pass.

The central gutter 7060 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, 37, 42 and 43 guides the game ball that has fallen from the notch 7051 of the back ball passage 7050 to the starting port unit 7070 and then recovers it. . Furthermore, the central gutter 7060 collects game balls entering the starter unit 7070 from a later-described starter 7071a. Thus, the central gutter 7060 is a game ball guided to the starting port unit 7070 via different routes (advantageous course or unfavorable course) (more specifically, the first starting port, that is, the base plate side Or a game ball that has won the starting port 7071a) is configured to be collectable to the pachinko game machine 1. The central gutter 7060 is arranged at the bottom of the center accessory 7000 behind the game area 20 . In this way, game balls flowing through the central gutter 7060 are made invisible to the player. Central gutter 7060 includes central gutter base 7061 , central gutter trim 7064 and central gutter cover 7065 .

A central gutter base 7061 shown in FIGS. 37, 42 and 43 constitutes the main structure of the central gutter 7060 . The central gutter base 7061 is formed with an inlet port 7061a, an introduction path 7061b, an outlet port 7061c, a gutter base side unfavorable passage 7061d, a gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e, a disadvantageous course outlet 7061f, and an advantageous course outlet 7061g.

The inflow port 7061a is a hole (entrance) for entering a game ball. The inlet 7061 a is formed at the upper right end of the central gutter base 7061 . The inflow port 7061a is formed in a generally quadrangular shape in plan view with the opening side facing upward. The inflow port 7061a is formed to have a size that allows a game ball to enter. The inflow port 7061 a is provided so as to be positioned below the notch 7051 . Thereby, the inflow port 7061a is configured so that the game ball flowing down from the notch 7051 can enter from above.

The lead-in path 7061b is a path for guiding a game ball entering the inflow port 7061a in the lower left direction. The lead-in path 7061b forms part of the "advantageous course". The introduction path 7061b is formed to extend in the lower left direction from the inlet 7061a.

The discharge port 7061c shown in FIG. 42 is a hole (exit) for discharging the game ball that has passed through the introduction path 7061b to the outside. The discharge port 7061c is formed at the lower left end of the introduction path 7061b so that the opening side faces forward.

A gutter base-side unfavorable passage 7061d shown in FIG. 42 forms part of the "unfavorable course". The gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d is formed on the left side of the discharge port 7061c so as to guide the game ball generally downward.

The gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e shown in FIG. 42 forms part of the "advantageous course". The gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e is formed on the right side of the discharge port 7061c so as to guide the game ball generally downward.

The unfavorable course discharge port 7061f shown in FIG. 42 is a hole (exit) for discharging the game ball that has passed through the "disadvantageous course" to the outside. The unfavorable course discharge port 7061f is formed at the lower end of the gutter base side unfavorable passage 7061d so as to open downward.

The advantageous course discharge port 7061g shown in FIG. 42 is a hole (exit) for discharging the game ball that has passed through the "advantageous course" to the outside. The advantageous course discharge port 7061g is formed at the lower end of the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e so as to open downward.

A central gutter decoration 7064 shown in FIGS. 37, 42 and 43 is formed to cover the introduction path 7061b from the front side.

The central gutter cover 7065 shown in FIGS. 37, 42 and 43 covers the central gutter base 7061 from the front side. The central gutter cover 7065 is formed with a gutter cover side advantageous outward path 7065a and a gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b.

The gutter cover side advantageous forward path 7065a shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a path that guides forward the game balls discharged from the outlet 7061c after passing through the lead-in path 7061b of the central gutter base 7061. The gutter cover side advantageous outbound route 7065a forms part of the "advantageous course". The gutter cover-side beneficial outward path 7065a is formed to penetrate the central gutter cover 7065 in the front-rear direction. The gutter cover side advantageous forward path 7065a is formed so that the upper side is open. A rear end portion of the gutter cover-side leading forward path 7065 a is formed to communicate with the discharge port 7061 c of the central gutter base 7061 .

The gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a passage for guiding the game ball returning after passing through the gutter cover side advantageous outward path 7065a and the like in the backward direction. The gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b forms part of the "advantageous course". The gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b is formed to penetrate the central gutter cover 7065 in the front-rear direction. The gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b is provided below the gutter cover side advantageous outward path 7065a. The gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b is formed so as to guide the game ball to the gutter base side advantageous path 7061e of the central gutter base 7061 .

Next, the configuration of the starting port unit 7070 will be described in detail.

The starting port unit 7070 shown in FIGS. 29, 30, 37, 42, and 43 is a unit body in which two first starting ports (a base plate-side forward route 7072b and a starting port 7071a) are integrated. Also inside the starting port unit 7070, the paths of the game balls passing through the two first starting ports are formed to be different from each other. That is, an advantageous course and a disadvantageous course are also formed inside the starting port unit 7070, and the game balls entered from the two first starting ports are configured so that they do not mix with each other (until they are discharged from the starting port unit 7070). be done. The starter door unit 7070 comprises a starter door ornament 7071 , a starter door base plate 7072 , a first proximity switch 7073 and a second proximity switch 7074 .

A starting port decoration 7071 shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a portion that constitutes the front side of the starting port unit 7070 . The starting mouthpiece 7071 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open rear side surface. Starter mouthpiece 7071 comprises starter mouth 7071a and decoration side advantageous passageway 7071b.

The starting port 7071a is a portion configured so that a game ball that has flowed down from the flow-down port 7042 of the stage 7040 can enter (see FIGS. 29 and 30). The starting port 7071a corresponds to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment. The starting port 7071 a is provided above the starting port decoration 7071 so as to be positioned directly below the flow-down port 7042 . The starting port 7071a is formed to be open upward and rearward.

The decoration side advantageous passage 7071b shown in FIG. 43 is a passage for guiding the game balls discharged from the discharge port 7061c of the central gutter base 7061 and sent to the starting port unit 7070 in the backward direction. The decoration-side advantageous passage 7071b is provided in the lower part of the starting mouth decoration 7071. As shown in FIG. The decoration-side advantageous passage 7071b is formed to be open upward and rearward.

A starting port base plate 7072 shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a portion that constitutes the rear side of the starting port unit 7070 . The starting port base plate 7072 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape in plan view. The starting port baseplate 7072 includes a baseplate-side unfavorable path 7072a, a baseplate-side beneficial outward path 7072b, and a baseplate-side beneficial return path 7072c.

The base plate side disadvantageous passage 7072a is a passage that guides the game ball entering the starting port 7071a backward. The base plate-side disadvantageous passage 7072a is formed in the upper portion of the starting port base plate 7072 so that the upper, front, and rear sides are open. A front end portion of the base plate side disadvantage passage 7072a is provided so as to communicate with a rear end portion of the starting port 7071a.

The base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b guides the game ball that has passed through the gutter cover side advantageous outward path 7065a forward, and is a passage (opening) that guides it to the starting port unit 7070 (decorative side advantageous passage 7071b). . The base plate-side beneficial outward path 7072b is formed to penetrate the starting port base plate 7072 in the front-rear direction. The base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b is provided below the base plate side unfavorable path 7072a (substantially in the center of the starting port base plate 7072). In addition, the base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b corresponds to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment.

The base plate side advantageous return path 7072c is a passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the decoration side advantage return path 7071b in the backward direction, and further guides it to the central gutter 7060 (gutter cover side advantage return path 7065b). The base plate side advantageous return path 7072c is formed to penetrate the starting port base plate 7072 in the front-rear direction. The base plate side return route 7072c is provided below the base plate side return route 7072b (below the start port base plate 7072).

In this manner, an inlet port 7061a, an introduction passage 7061b, an outlet port 7061c, a gutter cover side advantageous outward route 7065a, a base plate side advantageous outward route 7072b, a decoration side advantageous passage 7071b, a base plate side advantageous return route 7072c, and a gutter cover side advantageous return route 7065b. , the trough base side advantageous passage 7061e, the advantageous course outlet 7061g, and the like constitute the "advantageous course". On the other hand, the stage 7040, the starting port 7071a, the base plate side disadvantageous passage 7072a, the trough base side disadvantageous passage 7061d, the disadvantageous course outlet 7061f, and the like constitute the "unfavorable course".

The first proximity switch 7073 shown in FIG. 42 is a sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting port 7071a (first starting port). A first proximity switch 7073 is placed on a disadvantageous course. That is, the first proximity switch 7073 can detect that the game ball has passed through the "unfavorable course". A first proximity switch 7073 is located inside the central gutter 7060 . The first proximity switch 7073 is formed in a flat plate shape with its plate surface directed in the vertical direction. The first proximity switch 7073 is provided in the middle of the gutter base side unfavorable passage 7061d. The first proximity switch 7073 has a through hole 7073a.

The through-hole 7073a is a substantially circular hole in a front view that vertically penetrates the first proximity switch 7073 . The through hole 7073a has an inner diameter through which a game ball can pass.

The first proximity switch 7073 configured in this manner, for example, forms a magnetic field in the through hole 7073a and is configured to detect eddy currents generated when a game ball passes through the magnetic field (through hole 7073a). be. Based on the detection result of the eddy current, the first proximity switch 7073 detects that the game ball has entered the starting port 7071a (first starting port) (that the game ball has passed through the "unfavorable course"). ). The first proximity switch 7073 corresponds to the first starting switch 5472 in the first embodiment.

The second proximity switch 7074 shown in FIG. 42 is a sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b (first starting port). A second proximity switch 7074 is located on the advantage course. That is, the second proximity switch 7074 can detect that the game ball has passed through the "advantageous course". The second proximity switch 7074 is formed in a plate shape with its plate surface directed vertically. A second proximity switch 7074 is provided in the middle of the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e. The second proximity switch 7074 has a through hole 7074a.

The through-hole 7074a is a generally circular hole in a front view that vertically penetrates the second proximity switch 7074 . The through hole 7074a has an inner diameter through which a game ball can pass.

The second proximity switch 7074 configured in this manner, for example, forms a magnetic field in the through hole 7074a, and is configured to be capable of detecting an eddy current generated when a game ball passes through the magnetic field (through hole 7074a). be. Based on the detection result of the eddy current, the second proximity switch 7074 detects that the game ball has entered the base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b (first starting port) (“advantageous course”). passed). The second proximity switch 7074 corresponds to the first starting switch 5472 in the first embodiment.

Thus, in the starting port unit 7070, two pairs of starting ports and switches corresponding to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment (specifically, the starting port 7071a and the first proximity switch 7073, A base plate side forward path 7072b and a second proximity switch 7074) are provided. In this way, the starting port 7071a and the base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b each give an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit. 73 and the 2nd special design display part 74 are given the opportunity to display.

Next, the operation of the game ball sorting device 7200 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 40, 41, 44 and 45. FIG.

When the solenoid 7250 is in a non-energized state (non-excited state), the movable piece 7220 is positioned immediately below the communication hole 7031 as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 . Thereby, the communicating hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220 .

When the solenoid 7250 is in an energized state (excited state), it generates an attracting force upward. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, the solenoid 7250 attracts the metal piece 7240 upward by the attraction force. Then, the flapper 7230 swings clockwise about the axis of the second pin 7212 in the left side view. That is, the front portion of flapper 7230 swings upward.

Then, the protruding portion 7231 of the flapper 7230 presses the lower portion (front portion) of the movable piece 7220 upward and forward while sliding in the elongated hole 7222a of the movable piece 7220 from the other side (lower side) to the one side (upper side). do. As a result, the movable piece 7220 swings clockwise around the axis of the first pin 7211 in the left side view. Then, the movable piece upper portion 7221 of the movable piece 7220 swings (moves) rearward and downward, and is separated from the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030 . As a result, the movable piece upper portion 7221 of the movable piece 7220 opens the communication hole 7031 .

On the other hand, when the solenoid 7250 is in a non-energized state (non-excited state), it no longer produces upward attracting force. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the flapper 7230 swings counterclockwise around the axis of the second pin 7212 in the left side view due to its own weight. That is, the front portion of flapper 7230 swings downward.

Then, the projecting portion 7231 of the flapper 7230 slides in the elongated hole 7222a of the movable piece 7220 from one side (upper rear side) to the other side (lower front side), and moves the lower portion (front portion) of the movable piece 7220 downward. press. As a result, the movable piece 7220 swings counterclockwise around the axis of the first pin 7211 in the left side view. Then, the movable piece upper portion 7221 of the movable piece 7220 swings (moves) forward and upward, and approaches the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030 . As a result, the movable piece upper portion 7221 of the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031 . At this time, the upper passage 7030 and the game ball distribution device 7200 (the movable piece upper portion 7221) are arranged in a non-contact state with each other. Therefore, even if the game ball distribution device 7200 is in a closed state, the passage and the movable piece do not rub against each other, and dust generated by the rubbing does not occur. The minute device 7200 does not malfunction.

In this way, by swinging the movable piece 7220 downward (backward and downward direction), it is possible to separate from the communication hole 7031 and open the communication hole 7031 . In addition, by swinging the movable piece 7220 upward (front-upward direction), the communication hole 7031 can be closed by approaching the communication hole 7031 . In this way, the communication hole 7031 is closed and opened by the movable piece 7220 without the movable piece 7220 and the communication hole 7031 sliding against each other. Such operation of the movable piece 7220 can be performed by switching between an energized state and a non-energized state of the solenoid 7250 . That is, by switching between the energized state and the non-energized state of the solenoid 7250, the communication hole 7031 can be switched between closed and opened.

Thus, in the game ball sorting device 7200, by swinging the movable piece 7220, the communication hole 7031 can be closed and opened, and the game balls passing through the upper passage 7030 can be sorted into an advantageous course or a disadvantageous course.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, as described above, when the game balls are distributed to the advantageous course, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous course. is set to Furthermore, in the game ball distribution device 7200, the swinging of the movable piece 7220 is performed by time management using the open time timer (see distribution device control processing shown in FIG. 28), as described above. (and thus closing and opening of the communication hole 7031) are always repeated at a constant timing. Therefore, for example, if the player can aim and intentionally make the game ball reach the communication hole 7031 at a specific timing, the game ball sorting device 7200 will not perform appropriate sorting, and the game ball will move to an advantageous course. You will be guided.

In this way, if the game ball sorting device 7200 does not properly sort the balls, the degree of advantage for the player may increase intentionally, which is not desirable. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, the time at which the shot game ball reaches the communication hole 7031 is given randomness so that the game ball cannot intentionally reach the communication hole 7031 at a specific timing. It has a configuration (Kroon 7100 etc.) that can be used.

Next, using FIGS. 46 to 54, the flow of the game ball A entered into the ball entrance 7010 will be specifically described.

As shown in FIG. 46 , the game ball A entered into the ball entrance 7010 flows down the warp passage 7020 and is guided to the croon 7100 . In addition, in this embodiment, by making the rolling time of the game ball on the croon 7100 as long as possible, the timing of discharging the game ball from the croon 7100 is made difficult to be constant.

As shown in FIG. 47, the game ball A guided to the croon 7100 flows into the guide portion 7110 through the inlet 7111 . Here, the bottom portion 7112 is inclined downward to the right (see FIG. 36). Therefore, the game ball A guided to the guiding portion 7110 moves rightward on the bottom portion 7112 . At this time, since the game ball sent from the warp passage 7020 is imparted with backward momentum, in many cases, it moves rightward on the bottom surface portion 7112 while contacting the rear wall portion 7113b.

The game ball A moves rightward while contacting the rear wall portion 7113 b and is guided to the rolling portion 7120 . Specifically, the game ball A is guided to the starting point portion of the guide wall 7122 (the connection portion with the rear wall portion 7113b).

The game ball A guided to the starting point of the guide wall 7122 rolls clockwise on the bottom surface portion 7121 while contacting the guide wall 7122 . Then, the game ball A reaches the terminal portion of the guide wall 7122 (the connection portion with the front wall portion 7113a).

As shown in FIG. 48, the game ball A that has reached the end point of the guide wall 7122 rolls clockwise while contacting the corner of the stepped portion 7130 . At this time, as shown in FIG. 49, the game ball A rolls while being in contact with the corner of the stepped portion 7130 in a state in which a portion protrudes toward the guide portion 7110 side.

Here, as shown in FIG. 50, if the bulging portion 7122a is not provided on the guide wall 7122, the game ball A is near the starting point of the stepped portion 7130, and the protruding portion B (see FIG. 49) is , collide with the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 at an angle close to vertical. Then, the game ball A is repelled by the guide wall 7122 and is discharged outside from the discharge hole 7123a without rolling on the bottom surface portion 7121. - 特許庁As a result, the rolling time of the game ball A is shortened, and the role of the croon 7100 of giving randomness to the rolling time of the game ball A cannot be fulfilled.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the swelling portion 7122a is provided at the starting point of the guide wall 7122, the game ball A can be prevented from colliding with the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 at an angle close to vertical. can be done. That is, the game ball A smoothly contacts the guide wall 7122 at an angle close to being parallel to the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 . Therefore, the collision of the game ball A against the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 can be buffered. Therefore, the game ball A is not repelled by the guide wall 7122, and the game ball A can be prevented from being immediately discharged to the outside from the discharge hole 7123a.

The bottom portion 7121 is inclined downward toward the center (see FIG. 36). Therefore, the game ball A rolling on the bottom portion 7121 moves toward the center while rotating clockwise in plan view, and is guided to the discharge portion 7123 .

The game ball A guided to the discharge portion 7123 is guided downward while contacting the inner wall of the discharge hole 7123a and rotating clockwise in plan view. Here, since the discharge hole 7123a is formed in an inverted conical shape, the rotation speed does not easily decrease. Therefore, the maximum time until the game ball A is discharged from the discharge hole 7123a can be lengthened. Thus, by making the rolling time of the game ball on the croon 7100 as long as possible, the timing of discharging the game ball from the croon 7100 becomes difficult to be constant. That is, since the passing (rolling) time of the game ball passing through the croon 7100 can be given randomness, even if the player aims and hits, the game ball is intentionally transferred to the communication hole 7031 at a specific timing. cannot be reached.

As shown in FIG. 46, the game ball ejected from the ejection hole 7123a is received by the upper passage 7030. As shown in FIG. Since the upper passage 7030 is inclined downward to the right, the game ball is guided rightward by the upper passage 7030 . A game ball moving in the upper passage 7030 reaches a portion where the communication hole 7031 is provided.

Here, when the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220 of the game ball distribution device 7200, the game ball does not fall from the communication hole 7031 and moves rightward in the upper passage 7030, You will be guided to a "disadvantageous course". On the other hand, when the communicating hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220, the game ball falls from the communicating hole 7031 and is guided to the "advantageous course".

Below, the flow in which the game ball passes through the "disadvantageous course" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 51 , the game ball that has moved rightward through the upper passage 7030 without falling from the communication hole 7031 is guided to the right end of the stage 7040 . Since the right end of the stage 7040 is inclined downward to the left, the game ball that has flowed into the stage 7040 is guided leftward. The game ball flows down from any one of the flow-down ports 7041, 7042, and 7043 depending on conditions such as the speed of moving the stage 7040. FIG.

Here, when the game ball flows down from the right flow port 7041 and the left flow port 7043, the game ball flows downward as it is without entering the start port 7071a of the start port unit 7070. In this case, the player cannot win prize balls.

On the other hand, when the game ball flows down from the middle flow-down port 7042 , the game ball enters the starting port 7071 a of the starting port unit 7070 .

As shown in FIG. 52 , the game ball entered into the starting port 7071 a is guided backward by the base plate side disadvantageous passage 7072 a and sent to the central gutter 7060 . Then, the game ball is guided leftward and downward by the gutter base side unfavorable passage 7061 d and passes through the through hole 7073 a of the first proximity switch 7073 . Thereby, the main CPU 101 can confirm that the game ball has passed through the "unfavorable course". When the main CPU 101 confirms that the game ball has passed through the "unfavorable course", the main CPU 101 gives out a predetermined number of prize balls. The game ball that has passed through the first proximity switch 7073 is guided downward as it is, and is discharged to the outside from the disadvantageous course discharge port 7061f.

Next, the flow of the game ball passing through the "advantageous course" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 53 , the game ball flowing down from the communication hole 7031 enters the inlet 7061 a of the central gutter base 7061 . Then, the game ball passes through the introduction path 7061b and is discharged from the discharge port 7061c.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the game ball discharged from the discharge port 7061c is guided forward by the gutter cover side advantageous forward path 7065a and sent to the starting port unit 7070. The game ball sent to the starting port unit 7070 passes through the base plate side advantageous forward path 7072b and is sent to the starting port decoration 7071. The game ball sent to the starting opening decoration 7071 is guided backward by the decoration side advantageous passage 7071b (see FIG. 54).

Then, the game ball passes through the base plate side advantageous return path 7072 c and is sent to the central gutter 7060 . Then, the game ball passes through the gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b and is sent to the central gutter base 7061. - 特許庁The game ball sent to the central gutter base 7061 is guided rightward and downward by the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e and passes through the through hole 7074a of the second proximity switch 7074 (see FIG. 53). Thereby, the main CPU 101 can confirm that the game ball has passed through the "advantageous course". When the main CPU 101 confirms that the game balls have passed through the "advantageous course", the main CPU 101 gives more prize balls than the "disadvantageous course". The game ball that has passed through the second proximity switch 7074 is guided downward as it is, and is discharged to the outside from the advantageous course discharge port 7061g.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, by operating the movable piece 7220 of the game ball sorting device 7200, the game balls can be sorted into the "advantageous course" or the "unfavorable course". As a drive source for the movable piece 7220, a flapper type solenoid is used in which the power generating portion (solenoid 7250) and the driving portion (flapper 7230 and metal piece 7240) are not in contact with each other. It is possible to prevent problems such as looseness and the failure of the plunger to expand and contract properly due to solidification of dust generated by scraping of members.

Also, when the solenoid 7250 is not energized, the flapper 7230 moves to a position where the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031, and moves to that position by its own weight without using a biasing means such as a spring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the spring from deteriorating and preventing it from returning to the retracted position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the solenoid 7250 is constantly driven (set so that the opening timing of 0.5 seconds and the closing timing of 1.5 seconds are always alternately repeated). Such a setting can be said to be a state in which malfunctions in the operation of the movable piece 7220 are likely to occur. However, since the game ball sorting device 7200 is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles in the operation of the movable piece 7220 .

[First movable accessory unit]
A first movable accessory unit 6000 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 73. FIG.

The first movable accessory unit 6000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The first movable accessory unit 6000 is installed on the game board 17 . The first movable accessory unit 6000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling the movement of the movable body at a position visible to the player on the game board 17 . The first movable accessory unit 6000 comprises a first movable mechanism 6100, first movement control means 6120, second movable mechanism 6200, second movement control means 6260, third movable mechanism 6300 and third movement control means 6340. is doing.

In the first movable accessory unit 6000, the movable body is a part imitating an arm having a hand or a wrist and is driven (for example, a wrist part 6220, a back part 6230, an index finger part 6310, a ring finger, and a ring finger, which will be described later). portion 6320 and little finger portion 6330). The first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 have the movable body and drive the movable body.

The first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 are movement-controlled by first movement control means 6120, second movement control means 6260, and third movement control means 6340, respectively, which will be described later. Detailed descriptions of the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movement control means 6120, the second movable mechanism 6200, the second movement control means 6260, the third movable mechanism 6300, and the third movement control means 6340 will be given later.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 to 61 and FIG. 70, the initial state is a state in which the movement of the first movable accessory unit 6000 is not controlled. Also, as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, 68 and 69, and 71 to 73, the state in which the movement of the first movable accessory unit 6000 is controlled is the rendering state. 57 to 64 and FIGS. 67 to 69, an elevation cover member 6124, a wrist portion 6220, and a back portion 6230, which will be described later, are omitted.

The first movement control means 6120 shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 controls the movement of the first movable mechanism 6100 on the game board 17 so that it moves up and down along the vertical direction. The first movement control means 6120 mainly includes an elevation base member 6121 , an elevation cover member 6124 , an elevation motor 6130 , an elevation mechanism 6140 , an elevation assisting member 6150 and a lock member 6160 . Note that the configuration of the first movement control means 6120 will be described below based on the initial state.

57 to 59, the elevation base member 6121 shown in FIG. 62 is provided with an elevation motor 6130 and an elevation mechanism 6140, which will be described later. The elevating base member 6121 is fixed to the game board 17 . The elevating base member 6121 has a substantially inverted L shape (a shape in which the letter L is inverted upside down) when viewed from the front (see FIG. 62). The lift base member 6121 mainly includes a body portion 6122 and a holding portion 6123 .

A lifting motor 6130 and a lifting mechanism 6140, which will be described later, are installed on the main body 6122. As shown in FIG. The body portion 6122 is formed in an elongated shape along the vertical direction. The body portion 6122 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction.

The holding part 6123 holds the first movable mechanism 6100 in the initial state. The holding portion 6123 protrudes rightward from the right end portion of the main body portion 6122 . The holding portion 6123 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction.

The elevating cover member 6124 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 covers the main body 6122 and an elevating mechanism 6140 which will be described later. The lift cover member 6124 is fixed to the body portion 6122 . In addition, the elevating cover member 6124 and the body portion 6122 constitute a housing that accommodates an elevating mechanism 6140, which will be described later.

Lifting motor 6130 is a drive source for moving first movable mechanism 6100 . The lifting motor 6130 is fixed to the upper end portion of the main body portion 6122 of the lifting base member 6121 . As shown in FIG. 61, the lift motor 6130 is provided such that the output shaft 6131 passes through the body portion 6122 in the front-rear direction and protrudes rearward.

A lifting mechanism 6140 shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 transmits the driving force generated by the lifting motor 6130 to the first movable mechanism 6100 . The lifting mechanism 6140 mainly includes an output gear 6141 , a first transmission gear 6142 , a second transmission gear 6143 , a pulley 6144 , a belt 6145 and a lifting guide 6146 . 60 and 61, the elevation base member 6121 is omitted.

An output gear 6141 shown in FIG. 60 takes out the driving force of the lifting motor 6130 . The output gear 6141 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft 6131 of the lifting motor 6130 .

The first transmission gear 6142 is arranged substantially below the output gear 6141 and meshes with the output gear 6141 . In this embodiment, the first transmission gear 6142 has a small-diameter portion (not shown) formed on the front side that is smaller in diameter than the portion shown in FIG. be. The first transmission gear 6142 rotates around its axis. In this embodiment, the first transmission gear 6142 is rotatably supported on the surface of the body portion 6122 facing forward.

The second transmission gear 6143 is arranged substantially below the first transmission gear 6142 and meshes with the first transmission gear 6142 . The second transmission gear 6143 rotates around its axis. In the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 6143 is rotatably supported on the forward facing surface of the body portion 6122 . The second transmission gear 6143 mainly includes a pulley portion 6143a.

A pulley portion 6143a shown in FIG. 61 transmits the driving force of the lifting motor 6130 to the belt 6145, which will be described later. The belt 6145 is wound around the pulley portion 6143a. A pulley portion 6143 a is formed at the front end portion of the second transmission gear 6143 . The pulley portion 6143a is formed in a circular shape centered on the axis of the second transmission gear 6143 when viewed from the front.

A belt 6145, which will be described later, is wound around a pulley 6144 shown in FIG. The pulley 6144 is arranged below the pulley portion 6143 a of the second transmission gear 6143 . In this embodiment, the pulley 6144 is rotatably supported by the lower end portion of the front facing surface of the body portion 6122 of the elevation base member 6121 .

The belt 6145 is endless and wound around the pulleys 6143 a and 6144 . The belt 6145 rotates as the pulley portion 6143a rotates. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the belt 6145 has rack-shaped teeth 6145a formed on a part of the inner peripheral surface facing the pulleys 6143a and 6144. As shown in FIG. The tooth portion 6145a engages with an engaging tooth portion 6112a provided on the first movable mechanism 6100, which will be described later.

The elevation guide 6146 shown in FIGS. 59 to 62 guides the guide portion 6113 provided in the first movable mechanism 6100. As shown in FIG. The lift guide 6146 guides the first movable mechanism 6100 in the vertical direction. The lift guide 6146 is shaped like a rod elongated in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, a pair of elevation guides 6146 are arranged on the body portion 6122 of the elevation base member 6121 with a space left and right.

A lift assisting member 6150 shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 urges the first movable mechanism 6100 upward. The rise assisting member 6150 mainly includes a case 6151 and a constant force spring 6152 .

A case 6151 shown in FIGS. 58 and 60 holds a constant force spring 6152, which will be described later, so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the horizontal direction. The case 6151 is fixed to the left upper end portion of the holding portion 6123 of the lifting base member 6121 .

The constant load spring 6152 is formed by winding a strip-shaped spring around a drum whose axial direction extends in the horizontal direction. The constant load spring 6152 is formed so that the returning force (torque) of one end of the constant load spring 6152 pulled out from the drum is constant. One end of constant force spring 6152 is connected to arm 6114 of first base member 6110 of first movable mechanism 6100 .

A lock member 6160 shown in FIGS. 60 to 62 holds the first movable mechanism 6100 in its initial state. The lock member 6160 is provided with a lock portion 6161 that protrudes forward in the protruded state so that it can be immersed. The lock member 6160 is provided so that the lock portion 6161 penetrates the holding portion 6123 of the elevation base member 6121 in the front-rear direction. Further, the lock member 6160 is provided on the right side of the holding portion 6123 of the lifting base member 6121, substantially in the center in the vertical direction (see FIG. 62).

The lock member 6160 has a coiled electric wire and a solenoid (not shown) that receives electric power and generates a magnetic field. The solenoid has a plunger (not shown) biased to protrude forward by a spring member (not shown), and the plunger is connected to the lock portion 6161 . The locking portion 6161 is retracted by the solenoid pulling the plunger backward as a magnetic field is generated by energization. Further, the locking portion 6161 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of the spring member as the energization is released.

The first movable mechanism 6100 shown in FIGS. 55 to 62 is controlled to move up and down on the game board 17 by the first movement control means 6120 . The first movable mechanism 6100 mainly has a first base member 6110 .

The first base member 6110 holds the second movable mechanism 6200 and second movement control means 6260 described later, and is connected to the first movement control means 6120 . The first base member 6110 mainly includes a body portion 6111 , an arm 6114 and a base cover 6117 .

A body portion 6111 shown in FIG. 60 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The body portion 6111 mainly includes a groove portion 6112 and a guide portion 6113 .

A groove 6112 shown in FIG. 60 is to which the belt 6145 of the lifting mechanism 6140 is connected. The groove portion 6112 is formed so as to be recessed forward on the rearward surface of the main body portion 6111 . Grooves 6112 are formed with engaging teeth 6112 a that engage teeth 6145 a of belt 6145 . In this embodiment, engaging tooth portions 6112a are formed at the upper and lower end portions of the groove portion 6112, respectively. The first base member 6110 is connected to the belt 6145 by engaging the engaging tooth portion 6112 a with the tooth portion 6145 a of the belt 6145 .

The guide portion 6113 shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is engaged with the elevation guide 6146 and is guided in the vertical direction. The guide part 6113 is formed on the surface of the main body part 6111 facing the rear. The vertical movement of the first movable mechanism 6100 is guided by the guided portion 6113 sliding on the outer peripheral surface of the elevation guide 6146 . In this embodiment, guide portions 6113 are provided at positions corresponding to the pair of elevation guides 6146 of the main body portion 6111 .

Arm 6114 supports second movable mechanism 6200 . The arm 6114 is provided at the upper end portion of the body portion 6111 so as to extend rightward from the right end portion of the body portion 6111 . In addition, the arm 6114 has a leading end in the extending direction extending obliquely to the upper right side. Arm 6114 mainly includes bearing portion 6115 and lock receiving portion 6116 .

The bearing portion 6115 is provided at the distal end portion of the arm 6114 in the extending direction. The bearing portion 6115 has a substantially circular hole shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The lock receiving portion 6116 receives the lock portion 6161 of the lock member 6160 . The lock receiving portion 6116 protrudes rightward from the upper end portion of the bearing portion 6115 . As shown in FIG. 60, the lower surface of the lock receiving portion 6116 faces the upper surface of the protruding lock portion 6161 . When the lower surface of the lock receiving portion 6116 faces the upper surface of the lock portion 6161, the first movable mechanism 6100 is restricted from falling.

A base cover 6117 shown in FIGS. 55, 56, 63 and 64 holds a rotation mechanism 6270, which will be described later, together with the main body 6111. As shown in FIG. The base cover 6117 is arranged on the front side of the body portion 6111 . The base cover 6117 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction.

The second movement control means 6260 shown in FIGS. 58, 63 and 64 controls the movement of the second movable mechanism 6200 on the game board 17 so that it rotates (rocks) around a rotation shaft 6211 which will be described later. It is something to do. The second movement control means 6260 mainly includes a rotating motor 6261 and a rotating mechanism 6270 . Further, hereinafter, when describing the positional relationship of the members constituting the second movement control means 6260, the first movable mechanism 6100 is in a lowered state as shown in FIG. The description will be made on the basis of the state before the is rotated (the descending state described later).

A rotation motor 6261 is a drive source for moving the second movable mechanism 6200 . As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the rotating motor 6261 is fixed to a portion below the arm 6114 on the forward facing surface of the base cover 6117 . The rotation motor 6261 is provided such that the output shaft 6262 penetrates the base cover 6117 in the front-rear direction and protrudes rearward.

A rotating mechanism 6270 shown in FIGS. 63 and 64 transmits the driving force generated by the rotating motor 6261 to the second movable mechanism 6200 . The rotating mechanism 6270 mainly includes an output gear 6271 , a first transmission gear 6272 and a rotating arm 6273 .

The output gear 6271 takes out the driving force of the rotation motor 6261 . The output gear 6271 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft 6262 of the rotating motor 6261 .

The first transmission gear 6272 is arranged substantially above the output gear 6271 and meshes with the output gear 6271 . The first transmission gear 6272 rotates around its axis. In this embodiment, the first transmission gear 6272 is rotatably supported on the rearward surface of the base cover 6117 . The first transmission gear 6272 mainly includes an eccentric shaft portion 6272a.

The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is a substantially cylindrical member. The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The front end of the eccentric shaft portion 6272a is connected to the rearward surface of the first transmission gear 6272 . The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is arranged at a position (eccentric position) at a predetermined distance from the center of the first transmission gear 6272 in a rear view. The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is inserted through a first elongated hole 6275a, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the eccentric shaft portion 6272a is a substantially cylindrical bushing having a flange portion with an outer diameter larger than the groove width of the first long hole 6275a so as to suppress slipping out of the first long hole 6275a. It is fixed at the rear end.

The rotating arm 6273 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The rotating arm 6273 connects the eccentric shaft portion 6272a of the first transmission gear 6272 and a later-described rotating pin 6212 of the second movable mechanism 6200 . The rotating arm 6273 has a substantially inverted L shape when viewed from the back. The rotating arm 6273 mainly includes a rotating shaft 6274 , a short side portion 6275 and a long side portion 6276 .

The rotating shaft 6274 is a shaft that serves as a rotating fulcrum of the rotating arm 6273 . The rotation shaft 6274 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rotating shaft 6274 is a substantially cylindrical member. In this embodiment, the rotation shaft 6274 is rotatably supported on the surface of the base cover 6117 facing the rear side.

The short side portion 6275 is a side portion that extends toward the first transmission gear 6272 with the rotating shaft 6274 side as a base end. A first elongated hole 6275a is formed through the short side portion 6275 in the front-rear direction on the distal end side of the short side portion 6275 in the extending direction (longitudinal direction). The eccentric shaft portion 6272a of the first transmission gear 6272 is inserted through the first long hole 6275a. The first elongated hole 6275a is formed to linearly extend a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the short side portion 6275 .

The long side portion 6276 is a side portion extending toward the second movable mechanism 6200 with the rotation shaft 6274 side as a base end portion. The long side portion 6276 is longer than the short side portion 6275 . A second elongated hole 6276a is formed through the long side portion 6276 in the front-rear direction on the distal end side of the long side portion 6276 in the extending direction (longitudinal direction). A later-described rotation pin 6212 provided in the second movable mechanism 6200 is inserted through the second elongated hole 6276a. The second elongated hole 6276a is formed to linearly extend a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the long side portion 6276 . In addition, the second elongated hole 6276a has a bent portion 6276b that bends substantially upward on the distal end side in the longitudinal direction.

The movement of the second movable mechanism 6200 is controlled by the second movement control means 6260 so as to rotate (swing) on the game board 17 around a rotation shaft 6211, which will be described later. The second movable mechanism 6200 mainly includes a second base member 6210 , a base cover 6213 and a fixed finger portion 6214 .

The second base member 6210 shown in FIGS. 63, 64 and 67 holds the third movable mechanism 6300 and third movement control means 6340 described later, and is connected to the second movement control means 6260. As shown in FIG. The second base member 6210 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The second base member 6210 mainly includes a pivot shaft 6211 and a pivot pin 6212 .

The rotation shaft 6211 is a rotation fulcrum of the second movable mechanism 6200 . The rotation shaft 6211 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rotating shaft 6211 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The rotating shaft 6211 is provided so as to protrude rearward from the rearward facing surface of the second base member 6210 . The rotating shaft 6211 is inserted through a bearing portion 6115 provided on the arm 6114 of the first base member 6110 . In this embodiment, the rotating shaft 6211 is inserted through the bearing portion 6115 via a substantially cylindrical bush.

The rotating pin 6212 is a shaft inserted through the second long hole 6276 a of the rotating arm 6273 . The rotation pin 6212 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rotating pin 6212 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The pivot pin 6212 is connected at its front end to the rear facing surface of the second base member 6210 . In the present embodiment, a disc-shaped washer having an outer diameter larger than the groove width of the second long hole 6276a is fixed to the rear end of the rotating pin 6212 so as to prevent it from slipping out of the second long hole 6276a. It is

A base cover 6213 shown in FIGS. 65 and 67 holds an opening/closing mechanism 6350 to be described later together with the second base member 6210 . The base cover 6213 is arranged on the front side of the second base member 6210 . The base cover 6213 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the base cover 6213 constitutes a reflecting member 6231 of the back portion 6230 and a reflecting member 6241 of the middle finger portion 6240, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reflecting member 6231 and the reflecting member 6241 of the base cover 6213 will be given later.

A fixed finger portion 6214 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is a portion that constitutes a finger-like portion in the second movable mechanism 6200 . The fixed finger portion 6214 is fixed to the second base member 6210 so as to cover the front side of the second base member 6210 . Fixed finger portion 6214 includes wrist portion 6220 , back portion 6230 , middle finger portion 6240 and thumb portion 6250 .

A wrist portion 6220 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 covers the left portion of the second base member 6210 . Back part 6230 covers the right part of second base member 6210 . In this embodiment, the wrist portion 6220 and the back portion 6230 are integrally formed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the vertical centers of the wrist portion 6220 and the back portion 6230 are the translucent portions 6221 and 6234 formed of a transmissive member. The translucent portion 6221 and the translucent portion 6234 are made of the same material as the lens member 6244 which will be described later.

The middle finger portion 6240 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 65 and 66 protrudes rightward from the right end portion of the back portion 6230. As shown in FIGS. The middle finger portion 6240 includes a reflective member 6241 , a substrate 6242 , a light guide member 6243 , a lens member 6244 and a cover member 6245 .

A reflecting member 6241 shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 is fixed to the second base member 6210 . The reflecting member 6241 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The reflecting member 6241 is formed of a member capable of reflecting light emitted from a light emitting means 6242a, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the reflecting member 6241 has a substantially plate shape elongated in the left-right direction. Further, in this embodiment, the reflecting member 6241 constitutes the right side portion of the base cover 6213 .

The reflecting member 6241 is provided so as to be positioned outside (on the right side) of the right end of the substrate 6242, which will be described later. In addition, the reflecting member 6241 is on the rear side (position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface) of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242, and can reflect light emitted from the end of the lens member 6244 described later. is placed in a suitable position. In this embodiment, the right side portion of the reflecting member 6241 is an inclined portion that is inclined rearward toward the right side so that the right side end portion is positioned rearwardly of the back surface of the substrate 6242 described later. 6241a.

The substrate 6242 is for mounting electronic components (functional components). The substrate 6242 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The substrate 6242 has a front surface as a mounting surface on which the light emitting means 6242a is mounted. The substrate 6242 is arranged on the front side of the reflecting member 6241 .

In this embodiment, the substrate 6242 has a substantially plate shape elongated in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, the substrate 6242 has substantially the same shape as the reflecting member 6241 when viewed from the front, except for the inclined portion 6241a, and is formed to have a smaller area than the reflecting member 6241 .

The light guide member 6243 guides the light emitted from the light emitting means 6242a. The light guide member 6243 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 6243 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The light guide member 6243 is arranged so as to cover the front side of the substrate 6242, guides the light introduced from the light emitting means 6242a in the plate surface direction inside the light guide member 6243, and guides it to the outside of the light guide member 6243. do. In this embodiment, the light guide member 6243 has a substantially plate shape elongated in the left-right direction.

The light guide member 6243 is provided so as to be positioned outside (on the right side) of the right end portion of the substrate 6242 from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242 . Further, the light guide member 6243 is provided on the rear side of the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242 (position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface). In the present embodiment, the light guide member 6243 has an inclined portion 6243a in which the right side portion is inclined rearward toward the right side so that the right side end portion is positioned on the rear side of the back surface of the substrate 6242. It is said that Also, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6243 a is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6241 a of the reflecting member 6241 . In this embodiment, the light guide member 6243 has a shape substantially corresponding to that of the reflecting member 6231 when viewed from the front.

The lens member 6244 is arranged to cover the front side of the light guide member 6243 . Lens member 6244 is formed of a transparent member. A lens member 6244 diffuses the light guided from the light guide member 6243 . The lens member 6244 is arranged to cover the upper side, the front side, the lower side, and the right side of the right side portions of the reflecting member 6241, the substrate 6242, and the light guide member 6243, respectively.

The lens member 6244 is provided so as to be positioned outside (on the right side) of the right end portion of the substrate 6242 from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242 . In addition, the light guide member 6243 extends to the rear side of the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242 (position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface). In this embodiment, the right side portion of the lens member 6244 (the portion surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. A sloped portion 6244a slopes rearward as it goes to the side.

The inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244 extends so as to be inclined in a manner different from the inclined portion 6241a of the reflecting member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 . In this embodiment, when viewed in the vertical direction, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244 with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6241a of the reflecting member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 with respect to the horizontal plane. ing. As a result, the inclined portion 6241a of the reflecting member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 are arranged such that the leading end side in the extending direction is close to the leading end side in the extending direction of the lens member 6244 .

The cover member 6245 is arranged to cover the light guide member 6243 together with the lens member 6244 . Cover member 6245 is formed of an impermeable member. In this embodiment, the cover member 6245 is arranged to cover the upper, front, and lower sides of the left side portions of the reflective member 6241, the substrate 6242, and the light guide member 6243, respectively.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, the back part 6230 also includes a reflecting member 6231, a substrate 6232, and a light guide member 6233 similar to the middle finger part 6240 described above. In this embodiment, the reflective member 6231 of the back portion 6230 and the reflective member 6241 of the middle finger portion 6240 are integrally formed to form the base cover 6213 . Reflective member 6231 of back part 6230 constitutes the left side portion of base cover 6213 . Further, in this embodiment, the substrate 6232 and the light guide member 6233 of the back portion 6230 are also formed integrally with the substrate 6242 and the light guide member 6243 of the middle finger portion 6240, respectively.

The thumb portion 6250 protrudes obliquely downward and to the right from the right upper end portion of the back portion 6230 . The thumb portion 6250 includes a reflective member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member and a cover member. The configuration of the reflecting member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the thumb portion 6250 is the same as the reflecting member 6241, the substrate 6242, the light guide member 6243, the lens member 6244, and the cover member 6245 of the middle finger portion 6240 described above. , are substantially the same except for the specific shape, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third movement control means 6340 shown in FIGS. 58 and 67 to 69 controls the movement of the third movable mechanism 6300 to rotate (open and close) on the game board 17 . The third movement control means 6340 mainly includes an opening/closing motor 6341 and an opening/closing mechanism 6350 . In the following description, the positional relationship of the members constituting the third movement control means 6340 will be described with reference to the initial state (the state shown in FIG. 67). Also, in FIG. 67, the base cover 6213 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

The open/close motor 6341 is a drive source for moving the third movable mechanism 6300 . The open/close motor 6341 is fixed to the lower end portion on the left side of the surface of the base cover 6213 facing the rear side. The opening/closing motor 6341 is provided so that the output shaft 6342 projects rightward. The output shaft 6342 rotates around an axis along the left-right direction.

The opening/closing mechanism 6350 transmits the driving force generated by the opening/closing motor 6341 to the third movable mechanism 6300 . The opening/closing mechanism 6350 mainly includes an output gear 6351, a first transmission gear 6352, a second transmission gear 6353, an upper first arm 6354, an upper second arm 6355, a lower first arm 6356 and a lower second arm 6357. do.

The output gear 6351 takes out the driving force of the open/close motor 6341 . The output gear 6351 is fixed to the right end of the output shaft 6342 of the rotating motor 6261 .

The first transmission gear 6352 is arranged substantially above the output gear 6351 and meshes with the output gear 6351 . The first transmission gear 6352 is arranged to rotate about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the first transmission gear 6352 is rotatably supported on the surface of the base cover 6213 facing the rear side. The first transmission gear 6352 transmits the rotation of the output shaft 6342 about its axis in the left-right direction as rotation about its axis in the front-rear direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 6352 has a small-diameter portion formed on the front side that is smaller in diameter than the portion that meshes with the output gear 6351. Teeth are engaged.

The second transmission gear 6353 is arranged substantially above the first transmission gear 6352 and meshes with the first transmission gear 6352 . The second transmission gear 6353 is arranged to rotate about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the second transmission gear 6353 is rotatably supported on the rearward surface of the base cover 6213 . In this embodiment, the second transmission gear 6353 is formed in a substantially semicircular shape when viewed from the front.

The upper first arm 6354 is arranged substantially to the right of the second transmission gear 6353 . The upper first arm 6354 is arranged to rotate about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the upper first arm 6354 is rotatably supported on the surface of the base cover 6213 facing the rear side. The upper first arm 6354 mainly includes a gear portion 6354a, an arm portion 6354b and a shaft portion 6354c.

The gear portion 6354 a is meshed with the second transmission gear 6353 . The gear portion 6354a is formed in a substantially fan shape with a predetermined center angle around the axis of the upper first arm 6354 when viewed from the front. The arm portion 6354b extends obliquely upward to the right from the axis of the upper first arm 6354 . The shaft portion 6354c is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 6354c is formed to protrude forward at the distal end of the arm portion 6354b in the extending direction.

The upper second arm 6355 is arranged substantially to the right of the upper first arm 6354 . The upper second arm 6355 mainly includes an arm portion 6355a and an index finger side extension portion 6355d.

The arm portion 6355 a is connected to the upper first arm 6354 . The arm portion 6355a extends obliquely downward to the right from the upper first arm 6354 side. The arm portion 6355a mainly includes an elongated hole 6355b and a rotating shaft 6355c.

The long hole 6355b is formed to pass through the left end of the arm portion 6355a in the front-rear direction. The long hole 6355b is formed to linearly extend a predetermined distance along the extension direction (longitudinal direction) of the arm portion 6355a. The shaft portion 6354c of the upper first arm 6354 is inserted through the elongated hole 6355b, and the upper first arm 6354 and the upper second arm 6355 are connected.

The rotating shaft 6355c is formed at the right end of the arm portion 6355a. The rotation shaft 6355c is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rotating shaft 6355 c serves as a rotating fulcrum of the upper second arm 6355 . The rotating shaft 6355c is rotatably supported substantially in the vertical direction on the right side of the surface of the base cover 6213 facing the rear side.

An index finger portion 6310, which will be described later, is fixed to the index finger side extension portion 6355d. The index-finger-side extension portion 6355d extends obliquely upward and to the right from the longitudinal middle portion of the arm portion 6355a.

The lower first arm 6356 is arranged substantially below the upper first arm 6354 . The lower first arm 6356 is arranged to rotate about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The lower first arm 6356 is rotatably supported on the surface of the base cover 6213 facing the rear side. The lower first arm 6356 mainly includes a gear portion 6356a, an arm portion 6356b and a shaft portion 6356c.

Gear portion 6356 a meshes with gear portion 6354 a of upper first arm 6354 . The gear portion 6354a forms an arc having a predetermined central angle with the axis of the lower first arm 6356 as the center of the circle when viewed from the front. The arm portion 6356b extends obliquely downward to the right from the axis of the lower first arm 6356 . The shaft portion 6356c is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 6356c is formed to protrude forward at the distal end of the arm portion 6356b in the extending direction.

The lower second arm 6357 is arranged substantially to the right of the lower first arm 6356 . The lower second arm 6357 mainly includes an arm portion 6357a and a ring finger/little finger side extension portion 6357d.

Arm portion 6357 a is connected to lower first arm 6356 . The arm portion 6357a extends obliquely upward to the right from the lower first arm 6356 side. The arm portion 6357a mainly includes an elongated hole 6357b and a rotating shaft 6357c.

The long hole 6357b is formed to pass through the left end of the arm portion 6357a in the front-rear direction. The long hole 6357b is formed to linearly extend a predetermined distance along the extension direction (longitudinal direction) of the arm portion 6357a. The shaft portion 6356c of the lower first arm 6356 is inserted through the elongated hole 6357b, and the lower first arm 6356 and the lower second arm 6357 are connected.

The rotating shaft 6357c is formed at the right end of the arm portion 6357a. The rotation shaft 6357c is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rotating shaft 6357 c serves as a rotating fulcrum of the lower second arm 6357 . The rotation shaft 6357c is rotatably supported on the right side of the surface of the base cover 6213 facing the rear side, substantially in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the rotation shaft 6357c of the lower second arm 6357 and the rotation shaft 6355c of the upper second arm 6355 are coaxially connected.

The ring finger/little finger side extending portion 6357d is to which a ring finger portion 6320 and a little finger portion 6330, which will be described later, are fixed. The ring finger/little finger side extension portion 6357d extends obliquely downward and to the right from the longitudinal middle portion of the arm portion 6357a.

The third movable mechanism 6300 is controlled to open and close vertically on the game board 17 by a third movement control means 6340 . The third movable mechanism 6300 mainly includes an index finger portion 6310 , a ring finger portion 6320 and a little finger portion 6330 .

The index finger portion 6310 protrudes rightward from the right end portion of the back portion 6230 . The index finger portion 6310 is fixed to the index finger side extension portion 6355 d of the opening/closing mechanism 6350 . The index finger portion 6310 comprises a reflective member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member and a cover member. The configuration of the reflecting member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the index finger portion 6310 is the same as that of the reflecting member 6241, the substrate 6242, the light guide member 6243, the lens member 6244, and the cover member 6245 of the middle finger portion 6240 described above. , are substantially the same except for the specific shape, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ring finger portion 6320 protrudes rightward from the right end portion of the back portion 6230 . The ring finger portion 6320 is fixed to the ring finger/little finger side extension portion 6357 d of the opening/closing mechanism 6350 . The ring finger portion 6320 includes a reflective member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member and a cover member. The configurations of the reflecting member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the ring finger portion 6320 are the same as those of the reflecting member 6241, the substrate 6242, the light guide member 6243, the lens member 6244, and the cover member 6245 of the middle finger portion 6240 described above. , are substantially the same except for the specific shape, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The little finger portion 6330 protrudes rightward from the right end portion of the back portion 6230 . The little finger portion 6330 is fixed to the ring finger/little finger side extension portion 6357 d of the opening/closing mechanism 6350 . The little finger portion 6330 includes a reflective member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member and a cover member. The configurations of the reflecting member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the little finger portion 6330 are the same as those of the reflecting member 6241, the substrate 6242, the light guide member 6243, the lens member 6244, and the cover member 6245 of the middle finger portion 6240 described above. , are substantially the same except for the specific shape, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Movement control of the first movable accessory unit 6000 configured as described above will be described below. In the following, movement control for bringing the first movable accessory unit 6000 in the initial state into the rendering state will be described.

In the initial state shown in FIG. 70, the first movable mechanism 6100 is positioned above the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the first movable mechanism 6100 is arranged behind the upper part of the center accessory 7000 . In addition, in this embodiment, the first movable mechanism 6100 is hidden behind the decoration member 56 arranged on the upper part of the game board 17 and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

First, the first movement control by the first movement control means 6120 will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, when the lift motor 6130 is driven, the output gear 6141 and the first transmission gear 6142, which mesh with each other, rotate the second transmission gear 6143 clockwise around the axis. .

The rotation of the second transmission gear 6143 is transmitted to the belt 6145 wound around the pulley portion 6143a of the second transmission gear 6143 and the pulley 6144, and the belt 6145 rotates clockwise in rear view. As a result, the first movable mechanism 6100 connected to the belt 6145 moves downward (linear motion).

In the present embodiment, the restriction on the downward movement of the first movable mechanism 6100 by the lock member 6160 is released during the first movement control. The lock member 6160 is controlled to retract the lock portion 6161 during the first movement control. As a result, the lock portion 6161 is released from the lock receiving portion 6116 provided in the first movable mechanism 6100, and the first movable mechanism 6100 can move downward. Further, in the present embodiment, during the first movement control, the first movable mechanism 6100 moves downward against the upward biasing force of the constant force spring 6152 of the lift assisting member 6150 . In other words, it moves (falls) from top to bottom via the area on the left side of the game board 17 (first movement path). That is, the first movement path is the path of the first movable mechanism 6100 that moves as described above.

By controlling the movement as described above, the first movable mechanism 6100 enters a lowered state, which is one mode of the effect state, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 71 . In the lowered state, as shown in FIG. 71, the first movable mechanism 6100 is located on the lower side within the center accessory 7000. As shown in FIG. Also, in the lowered state, the first movable mechanism 6100 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the center accessory 7000 . Further, in the lowered state, the area through which the first movable mechanism 6100 passed (the area on the upper side of the first movable mechanism 6100 in the lowered state) of the first movement path becomes empty.

Next, the second movement control by the second movement control means 6260 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the rotating motor 6261 is driven, the first transmission gear 6272 rotates around the axis via the output gear 6271 which meshes with each other. As the first transmission gear 6272 rotates, the eccentric shaft portion 6272 a of the first transmission gear 6272 turns around the axis of the first transmission gear 6272 .

The eccentric shaft portion 6272a moves inside the first elongated hole 6275a of the rotating arm 6273 through which the eccentric shaft portion 6272a is inserted. Accordingly, the rotating arm 6273 rotates about the rotating shaft 6274 counterclockwise in rear view. As the rotating arm 6273 rotates, the rotating pin 6212 of the second movable mechanism 6200 moves in the second elongated hole 6276a, and the second movable mechanism 6200 rotates around the rotating shaft 6211 when viewed from the rear. It swings (rotates) clockwise. As a result, as shown in FIG. 64, the second movable mechanism 6200 swings so that the distal end side (hand side) moves upward. That is, the second movable mechanism 6200 rotates from bottom to top in an area (second movement path) from the lower center to the upper center of the game board 17 , which is the movement path of the second movable mechanism 6200 . That is, the second movement path is the path of the second movable mechanism 6200 that moves as described above.

Further, as described above, when the second movable mechanism 6200 is in a swinging state, as shown in FIG. match. Thereby, the posture of the second movable mechanism 6200 subjected to the second movement control is held.

By performing the movement control as described above, after the first movement control is executed, as shown in FIG. The second movable mechanism 6200 can be moved via two movement paths. That is, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves back while rotating in the area where the first movable mechanism 6100 fell (falls). The illustrated example shows an example in which the hand side of the second movable mechanism 6200 is moved to face upward. As a result, the space inside the center accessory 7000 can be effectively used.

Further, by controlling the movement as described above, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 72, the second movable mechanism 6200 enters a swinging state, which is one aspect of the rendering state. In the rocking state, as shown in FIG. 72, the hand side of the second movable mechanism 6200 is positioned so as to face obliquely upward to the upper right, so that the area ( The region below the second movable mechanism 6200 in the rocking state) is in a vacant state. Also, in this state, as shown in FIG. 72, the area of the first movement path through which the first movable mechanism 6100 passed (the second moving mechanism 6100 in the rocking state), excluding the area where the second moving mechanism 6200 is positioned. The area above the movable mechanism 6200) is also vacant. In the example of the figure, in the center accessory 7000, there is an area through which the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed diagonally to the upper left side of the second movable mechanism 6200 in the rocking state, and an area through which the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed is located diagonally to the lower right side. An example is shown where there is a region that the mechanism 6200 has passed.

Next, the third movement control by the third movement control means 6340 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when the opening/closing motor 6341 is driven, the upper first arm 6354 is moved to the front side through the output gear 6351, the first transmission gear 6352, and the second transmission gear 6353 which mesh with each other. Rotate clockwise. As the upper first arm 6354 rotates, the shaft portion 6354c of the upper first arm 6354 moves within the long hole 6355b of the upper second arm 6355, and the upper second arm 6355 rotates around the rotation shaft 6355c. , it rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. As a result, the index finger portion 6310 fixed to the index finger side extension portion 6355d of the upper second arm 6355 rotates such that the tip side (fingertip side) of the index finger portion 6310 moves upward. In other words, the game board 17 moves diagonally upward from diagonally downward in the upper center area (third movement path). That is, the third movement path is the path of index finger 6310 (third movable mechanism 6300) that moves as described above.

After the first movement control is executed by performing the movement control as described above, as shown in FIG. can be moved. Note that in the movement control described above, the index finger 6310 is moved to a region other than the second movement path on the first movement path. The illustrated example shows an example in which the fingertip side of the index finger 6310 is moved to face upward. In addition, by performing the movement control as described above, both the second movement control and the third movement control can be performed on the area (first movement path) used for the first movable mechanism 6100 to fall (fall). will be moved. As a result, the space inside the center accessory 7000 can be effectively used.

In addition, as the upper first arm 6354 rotates, the lower first arm 6356 rotates counterclockwise in front view through the gear portion 6356a that meshes with the gear portion 6354a of the upper first arm 6354. Rotate. As the lower first arm 6356 rotates, the shaft portion 6356c of the lower first arm 6356 moves inside the long hole 6357b of the lower second arm 6357, and the lower second arm 6357 rotates. It rotates around the drive shaft 6357c clockwise when viewed from the front. As a result, the tip side (fingertip side) of the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 fixed to the ring finger/little finger side extension portion of the lower second arm 6357 moves downward. Rotate so that That is, the central area (third movement path) of the game board 17 is moved from obliquely upward to obliquely downward. That is, the third movement path is also the path of the third finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 (the third movable mechanism 6300).

After the second movement control is executed by performing the movement control as described above, as shown in FIG. 73, the third finger portion 6320 and Little finger 6330 can be moved. The illustrated example shows an example in which the fingertip sides of the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 are moved downward. As a result, the space inside the center accessory 7000 can be effectively used.

Further, in this embodiment, movement of the index finger portion 6310, the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 is controlled by a single drive source (open/close motor 6341). Therefore, the index finger portion 6310, the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 swing together. Thus, in the third movement control, the movement of the second movable mechanism 6200 is controlled so that the index finger portion 6310, the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 are opened at the same time.

By controlling the movement as described above, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 73, the third movable mechanism 6300 is in a rotating state, which is one aspect of the rendering state. In the rotating state, the index finger portion 6310 is positioned in a space diagonally to the upper left side of the index finger portion 6310 in the swinging state. Further, in the rotating state, the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 are positioned diagonally to the lower right side than the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 in the swinging state. As a result, as shown in FIG. 73, the space in the center accessory 7000 is effectively used to move the movable bodies (the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200 and the third movable mechanism 6300) with a large motion. It can be controlled (opened and closed) and can give a visual impression (impact) to the player.

Also, when the first movable accessory unit 6000 in the effect state is brought into the initial state, the movement control opposite to the movement control described above is executed.

When the opening/closing motor 6341 of the third movement control means 6340 is rotated in a direction opposite to the movement control described above, the drive of the opening/closing motor 6341 is transmitted by the opening/closing mechanism 6350, so that the fingertip side of the index finger portion 6310 is downward. side (diagonally to the lower right side). Also, the fingertip sides of the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 swing upward (diagonally to the upper left side). As a result, the index finger portion 6310, the third finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 are mutually rotated so as to close.

Further, if the rotation motor 6261 of the second movement control means 6260 is rotated in the opposite direction to the above-described movement control, the driving of the rotation motor 6261 is transmitted by the rotation mechanism 6270 so that the second movement control means 6260 rotates. The movable mechanism 6200 swings so that the hand side moves downward (diagonally to the lower right).

Further, if the elevation motor 6130 of the first movement control means 6120 is rotated in a direction opposite to the above-described movement control, the drive of the elevation motor 6130 is transmitted to the elevation mechanism 6140, thereby causing the first movable mechanism 6100 to move. moves (rises) upward (first movement control). In the present embodiment, the first movable mechanism 6100 is urged upward by the constant load spring 6152 of the elevation assisting member 6150, so when it is lifted by the first movement control means 6120, the first movable mechanism 6100 moves upward. is assisted. In addition, in this embodiment, when the first movable accessory unit 6000 is in the initial state, the lock portion 6161 of the lock member 6160 is controlled to protrude. As a result, the upper surface of the lock portion 6161 faces the lower surface of the lock receiving portion 6116 of the first movable mechanism 6100, thereby restricting the first movable mechanism 6100 from falling.

As described above, according to the first movement control (linear motion), the second movement control (swing), and the third movement control (rotation), which are respectively different movement modes, the first movable mechanism 6100 , the movements of the second movable mechanism 6200 and the third movable mechanism 6300 can be varied, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, light emission control may be performed to cause wrist portion 6220, back portion 6230, middle finger portion 6240, thumb portion 6250, index finger portion 6310, ring finger portion 6320, and little finger portion 6330 to emit light. The mode of light emission will be described below using the middle finger portion 6240 shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 as an example.

As shown in FIG. 66, when the light emission control is executed, the light emitting means 6242a mounted on the substrate 6242 emits light. The light emitted from the light emitting means 6242 a enters the light guide member 6243 arranged on the front side of the substrate 6242 . In addition, in the figure, the light emitted by the light emitting means 6242a is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

Part of the light that enters (enters) the light guide member 6243 and enters the light guide member 6243 is divided into the light that passes through the light guide member 6243 and the surface of the light guide member 6243 (lens member 6244 side). and the light reflected against the surface of the surface). Another part of the light entering the light guide member 6243 is totally reflected inside the light guide member 6243 .

Specifically, of the light that enters the light guide member 6243, the angle of incidence with respect to the surface of the light guide member 6243 (the angle formed by the incident light and a line perpendicular to the surface in a cross-sectional view) ) is smaller than a predetermined angle, the light is transmitted through the light guide member 6243 and emitted to the anti-reflection member 6241 side, and the light is reflected on the surface of the light guide member 6243 and emitted to the reflection member 6241. divided into light and Further, of the light entering the light guide member 6243 , light with an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided in the surface direction of the light guide member 6243 while repeating total reflection inside the light guide member 6243 .

Part of the light that enters (enters) the lens member 6244 via the light guide member 6243 and enters the lens member 6244 is divided into the light that passes through the lens member 6244 and the surface of the lens member 6244 (anti-reflection light). and the light reflected on the surface on the side of the optical member 6243 . Another part of the light entering the lens member 6244 is totally reflected inside the lens member 6244 .

Specifically, of the light that enters the lens member 6244, the angle of incidence with respect to the surface of the lens member 6244 (the angle formed by the incident light and a line orthogonal to the surface in a cross-sectional view) is The light that is smaller than the predetermined angle is transmitted through the lens member 6244 and emitted toward the anti-light guide member 6243 side, and the light that is reflected on the surface of the lens member 6244 and is directed toward the light guide member 6243 (reflection member 6241 side). side) and the light emitted to the other side. Further, of the light entering the lens member 6244 , light having an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the plane of the lens member 6244 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 6244 .

Further, as described above, the light reflected by the lens member 6244 and the light guide member 6243 and emitted to the reflecting member 6241 side is reflected by the reflecting member 6241 and enters the lens member 6244 (the light guide member 6243) again. shine.

With the configuration as described above, the light reflected by the reflecting member 6241 is made incident on the lens member 6244 located on the back side of the mounting surface of the substrate 6242, where the light from the light emitting means 6242a is difficult to reach. Therefore, unevenness in irradiation through the lens member 6244 can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when viewed in the vertical direction, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244 with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6241a of the reflecting member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 with respect to the horizontal plane. making it bigger. As a result, the tip side in the extending direction of the inclined portion 6241a of the reflecting member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 is close to the tip side of the inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244 in the extending direction. As a result, the light through the light guide member 6243 and the reflecting member 6241 is allowed to enter from a position close to the end portion of the lens member 6244 in the extension direction, where light is difficult to reach, so that the light passes through the lens member 6244. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the irradiation.

[Second movable accessory unit]
A second movable accessory unit 8000 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 87. FIG.

The second movable accessory unit 8000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by emitting light at an appropriate timing. A second movable accessory unit 8000 is installed on the game board 17 . The second movable accessory unit 8000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling light emission of the accessory (movable light emitting body 8200 described later) at a position visible to the player on the game board 17. . Further, in the present embodiment, the accessory whose light emission is controlled is a movable light emitter that gives a visual impression to the player by moving it at an appropriate timing. Movement control of the movable light emitter 8200 is executed at a position on the game board 17 that is visible to the player. The second movable accessory unit 8000 mainly includes elevation control means 8100 and movable light emitter 8200 .

The movable light emitter 8200 is controlled to move by an elevation control means 8100 which will be described later. A movable light-emitting body 8200 is an accessory imitating a sword. A detailed description of the movable light emitter 8200 will be given later.

74 to 78, as shown in FIG. 85, the initial state is a state in which the movement of the movable light emitter 8200 is not controlled. 79 to 81, as shown in FIG. 86, the state in which the movement of the movable light emitting body 8200 is controlled is taken as an effect state. 76 to 78, 80 and 81, a cover member 8120, which will be described later, is omitted.

The elevation control means 8100 shown in FIGS. 74 to 82 controls the movement of the movable light emitter 8200 on the game board 17 so that it is vertically elevated. The elevation control means 8100 mainly includes an elevation base member 8110 , a cover member 8120 , a rotation guide portion 8121 , an elevation motor 8130 and an elevation mechanism 8140 . Note that the configuration of the elevation control means 8100 will be described below based on the initial state.

A lift base member 8110 shown in FIG. 82 holds a lift motor 8130 and a lift mechanism 8140 which will be described later. The movable light emitter 8200 is controlled to move vertically along the elevation base member 8110 . The elevating base member 8110 is fixed to the game board 17 . The elevating base member 8110 is formed in an elongated shape along the vertical direction. The elevating base member 8110 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. A lifting mechanism 8140 to be described later is arranged on the rear side of the lifting base member 8110 . Also, the elevation base member 8110 mainly includes a first guide groove 8111 , a second guide groove 8112 and a third guide groove 8113 .

The first guide groove 8111 shown in FIG. 82 guides the movable light emitter 8200 in the vertical direction. The first guide groove 8111 is formed through the elevation base member 8110 in the front-rear direction. The first guide groove 8111 is formed on the upper side of the elevation base member 8110 . In addition, the first guide groove 8111 has a vertically elongated hole shape.

The second guide groove 8112 guides the movable light emitter 8200 in the vertical direction. The second guide groove 8112 is formed through the elevation base member 8110 in the front-rear direction. The second guide groove 8112 is formed on the lower side of the elevation base member 8110 . In addition, the second guide groove 8112 has a vertically elongated hole shape. In addition, in this embodiment, a pair of second guide grooves 8112 are formed with an interval left and right.

The third guide groove 8113 guides the movable light emitter 8200 in the vertical direction. The third guide groove 8113 is formed through the elevation base member 8110 in the front-rear direction. The third guide groove 8113 is formed below the second guide groove 8112 in the elevation base member 8110 . In addition, the third guide groove 8113 has a vertically elongated hole shape.

A cover member 8120 shown in FIG. 74 holds an elevating mechanism 8140 to be described later together with an elevating base member 8110 . The cover member 8120 is arranged on the rear side of the lift base member 8110 . The cover member 8120 has a substantially box shape opening forward. The cover member 8120 and the elevation base member 8110 constitute a housing that accommodates the elevation mechanism 8140 .

A rotation guide portion 8121 shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 guides a rotation guide pin 8273a provided on a lever portion 8270, which will be described later. The rotation guide portion 8121 is provided on the rearward surface of the cover member 8120 (not shown). As shown in FIG. 78, the rotation guide portion 8121 has a substantially box shape that opens forward and leftward. Further, the rotation guide portion 8121 mainly includes a rotation guide groove 8121a.

The rotation guide groove 8121a shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 is through which a rotation guide pin 8273a, which will be described later, is inserted. The rotation guide groove 8121a is formed so as to pass through the rotation guide portion 8121 in the front-rear direction. The rotation guide groove 8121a has a vertically elongated hole shape. Further, the rotation guide groove 8121a has a bent portion 8121b that is bent so as to extend obliquely downward and to the right at the lower end side portion.

A lifting motor 8130 shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 is a drive source for moving the movable light emitting body 8200 . The lifting motor 8130 is fixed to the surface of the upper end of the lifting base member 8110 facing forward. An output shaft 8131 of the lift motor 8130 is provided so as to pass through the lift base member 8110 in the front-rear direction and protrude rearward (see FIG. 77).

The lifting mechanism 8140 shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 transmits the driving force generated by the lifting motor 8130 to the movable light emitter 8200. FIG. The lifting mechanism 8140 mainly includes an output gear 8141 , a first transmission gear 8142 , an intermediate transmission gear 8143 , a second transmission gear 8144 , an urging spring 8150 and a lock member 8160 .

An output gear 8141 shown in FIG. 77 takes out the driving force of the lifting motor 8130 . The output gear 8141 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft 8131 of the lift motor 8130 .

The first transmission gear 8142 meshes with the output gear 8141 . The first transmission gear 8142 is arranged substantially to the right of the output gear 8141 . The first transmission gear 8142 rotates around its axis. In this embodiment, the first transmission gear 8142 is rotatably pivoted on the surface of the cover member 8120 facing forward (not shown).

The intermediate transmission gear 8143 is arranged between the first transmission gear 8142 and a second transmission gear 8144 which will be described later. The intermediate transmission gear 8143 transmits the drive of the first transmission gear 8142 to the second transmission gear 8144 which will be described later. The intermediate transmission gear 8143 rotates around its axis. In this embodiment, the intermediate transmission gear 8143 is rotatably pivoted on the surface of the cover member 8120 facing forward (not shown). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of intermediate transmission gears 8143 (six in the figure) are arranged. Note that in FIG. 77, some of the intermediate transmission gears 8143 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

The second transmission gear 8144 meshes with the intermediate transmission gear 8143 . The second transmission gear 8144 is arranged substantially to the lower right of the first transmission gear 8142 . The second transmission gear 8144 meshes with a later-described rack portion 8222 provided on the movable light emitter 8200 . The second transmission gear 8144 rotates around its axis. In this embodiment, the second transmission gear 8144 is rotatably supported on the surface of the cover member 8120 facing forward (not shown).

A biasing spring 8150 shown in FIG. 76 biases the movable light emitter 8200 upward. In this embodiment, the urging spring 8150 is a coiled tension spring. One end of the biasing spring 8150 is connected to the upper side of the third guide groove 8113 in the lifting base member 8110 . The other end of the biasing spring 8150 is connected to a third guide pin 8242 provided on the movable light emitter 8200 and described later.

A lock member 8160 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 holds the movable light emitter 8200 in its initial state. The lock member 8160 is provided with a lock portion 8161 projecting rightward in the projecting state so as to be immersible. The lock member 8160 is provided on the surface of the lift base member 8110 facing the rear side. Further, the lock member 8160 is arranged at the upper left end portion of the lift base member 8110 so that the lock portion 8161 faces rightward.

The lock member 8160 has a coiled electric wire and a solenoid (not shown) that receives electric power and generates a magnetic field. The solenoid has a plunger (not shown) biased by a spring member (not shown) to protrude to the right, and the plunger is connected to the lock portion 8161 . The locking portion 8161 is retracted by the solenoid pulling the plunger leftward as a magnetic field is generated by energization. Further, the locking portion 8161 protrudes to the right due to the biasing force of the spring member as the energization is released.

A movable light emitter 8200 shown in FIGS. 74 to 81 is controlled to move up and down on the game board 17 by an elevation control means 8100 . The movable light emitter 8200 mainly includes a base member 8210 , a handle portion 8250 , a collar portion 8260 , a lever portion 8270 and a blade portion 8280 .

A base member 8210 shown in FIG. 82 is provided with a handle portion 8250, a collar portion 8260, a lever portion 8270, and a blade portion 8280, which will be described later. The base member 8210 is connected to the elevating base member 8110 so as to be vertically movable. The base member 8210 is arranged on the front side of the elevation base member 8110, as shown in FIG. The base member 8210 is formed in an elongated shape along the vertical direction. The base member 8210 is formed in a substantially plate shape with a plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The base member 8210 mainly includes a handle-side base portion 8220 , a collar-side base portion 8230 and a blade-side base portion 8240 .

The handle-side base portion 8220 constitutes the upper portion of the base member 8210 . A handle portion 8250 to be described later is installed on the handle-side base portion 8220 . The handle-side base portion 8220 has a shape corresponding to the handle portion 8250 described later. In this embodiment, the handle-side base portion 8220 has a vertically elongated shape. The handle-side base portion 8220 mainly includes a first guide pin 8221 and a rack portion 8222 .

The first guide pin 8221 shown in FIG. 82 is guided along the first guide groove 8111 of the elevating base member 8110 . The first guide pin 8221 is inserted through the first guide groove 8111 (not shown). The first guide pin 8221 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The first guide pin 8221 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The front end of the first guide pin 8221 is connected to the rearward surface of the handle-side base portion 8220 . Further, in this embodiment, a pair of first guide pins 8221 are provided vertically.

The rack portion 8222 shown in FIGS. 77, 78 and 81 meshes with the second transmission gear 8144 on the rear side of the lift base member 8110. As shown in FIG. The rack portion 8222 has a substantially rectangular block shape when viewed from the front. The rack portion 8222 is connected to the rear end portion of the first guide pin 8221 . That is, the rack portion 8222 is connected to the handle-side base portion 8220 via the first guide pin 8221 . In this embodiment, a pair of upper and lower first guide pins 8221 are respectively connected to the rack portion 8222 . Also, the rack portion 8222 mainly includes a tooth portion 8222a and a lock receiving portion 8222b.

The tooth portion 8222a is a portion that meshes with the second transmission gear 8144 . The tooth portion 8222 a is arranged to the right of the second transmission gear 8144 . The tooth portion 8222 a is formed over the top and bottom of the rack portion 8222 .

The lock receiving portion 8222b shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 receives the lock portion 8161 of the lock member 8160. As shown in FIGS. The lock receiving portion 8222 b is formed on the left side of the rack portion 8222 at a position facing the lock portion 8161 . The lock receiving portion 8222b is formed in a concave shape that opens in the front-rear direction and leftward. As shown in FIG. 77, when the lock receiving portion 8222b receives the lock portion 8161, the movable light emitting body 8200 is restricted from falling.

A flange-side base portion 8230 shown in FIG. 82 constitutes an intermediate portion of the base member 8210 in the vertical direction. A collar portion 8260 to be described later is installed on the collar portion-side base portion 8230 . The flange-side base portion 8230 has a shape corresponding to a flange portion 8260 to be described later. In the present embodiment, the collar-side base portion 8230 is wider in the lateral direction than the handle-side base portion 8220 . The flange-side base portion 8230 mainly includes a shaft hole 8231 and a boss portion 8232 .

A pivot shaft 8272 of a lever portion 8270 to be described later is inserted through the shaft hole 8231 . The shaft hole 8231 is formed so as to pass through the left side portion of the flange side base portion 8230 in the front-rear direction.

A boss portion 8232 shown in FIG. 78 is formed so as to protrude from the surface facing the rear side of the left side portion of the collar portion side base portion 8230 . The boss portion 8232 is cylindrical. In this embodiment, a shaft hole 8231 is formed to pass through the boss portion 8232 in the front-rear direction.

The blade-side base portion 8240 constitutes the lower portion of the base member 8210 . The blade portion side base portion 8240 is provided with a blade portion 8280 to be described later. The blade-side base portion 8240 has a shape corresponding to the blade portion 8280 described later. In this embodiment, the blade-side base portion 8240 is wider in the left-right direction than the collar-side base portion 8230 and has a vertically elongated shape.

In this embodiment, the blade-side base portion 8240 constitutes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from a light emitting means 8281a, which will be described later. A detailed description of the blade-side base portion 8240 as a reflecting member will be given later. The blade-side base portion 8240 mainly includes a second guide pin 8241 and a third guide pin 8242 .

The second guide pin 8241 shown in FIGS. 76, 78 and 82 is inserted through the second guide groove 8112 of the lift base member 8110 and guided along the second guide groove 8112. As shown in FIG. The second guide pin 8241 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The second guide pin 8241 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The front end of the second guide pin 8241 is connected to the rear facing surface of the blade-side base portion 8240 . In addition, in this embodiment, a pair of second guide pins 8241 are formed with a space left and right so as to correspond to the pair of second guide grooves 8112 . In this embodiment, the second guide pin 8241 is a substantially cylindrical bush having a flange portion with an outer diameter larger than the groove width of the second guide groove 8112 so as to suppress slipping out of the second guide groove 8112. , is fixed to the rear end (see FIG. 78).

The third guide pin 8242 shown in FIGS. 76 and 82 is inserted through the third guide groove 8113 of the elevating base member 8110 and guided along the third guide groove 8113 . The third guide pin 8242 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The third guide pin 8242 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The front end of the third guide pin 8242 is connected to the rear facing surface of the blade-side base portion 8240 . Further, in this embodiment, the third guide pin 8242 is connected to the other end side of the biasing spring 8150 (see FIG. 76).

A handle portion 8250 shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 is fixed so as to cover the handle-side base portion 8220 . The handle 8250 has a shape that imitates the handle of a sword.

The collar part 8260 is fixed so as to cover the collar part side base part 8230 . The brim portion 8260 has a shape that imitates the brim of a sword.

The lever portion 8270 shown in FIGS. 74 to 81 is connected to the collar-side base portion 8230 and rotates with respect to the collar-side base portion 8230 . The lever portion 8270 mainly includes a lever body 8271 , a rotating shaft 8272 and an arm 8273 .

The lever main body 8271 is a member that extends obliquely upward and to the left from the side of the flange-side base portion 8230 . The lever main body 8271 is arranged on the surface side of the flange-side base portion 8230 facing forward. The lever portion 8270 has a shape that imitates a lever installed on a handle, such as a clutch lever or a brake lever of a motorcycle.

A rotating shaft 8272 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 is a shaft connected to the lever main body 8271 . The front end of the rotating shaft 8272 is connected to the base end side of the lever main body 8271 (the side of the flange-side base portion 8230). The rotating shaft 8272 has a substantially cylindrical shape. The rotation shaft 8272 is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rotating shaft 8272 is inserted through a shaft hole 8231 (see FIG. 82) formed in the boss portion 8232 of the flange-side base portion 8230 . The rotation shaft 8272 is inserted through the shaft hole 8231 so that the lever portion 8270 is pivotally supported on the flange side base portion 8230 .

An arm 8273 shown in FIG. 77 is a member that extends obliquely to the upper right side from the flange-side base portion 8230 side. 78, the arm 8273 is connected to the rear end of the rotary shaft 8272 at its base end (on the collar side base portion 8230 side). In this embodiment, the arm 8273 is arranged on the distal end side of the boss portion 8232 of the flange-side base portion 8230 in the projecting direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the arm 8273 is arranged such that the leading end in the extending direction is received in the rotation guide portion 8121 through the leftward opening of the rotation guide portion 8121 . Also, the arm 8273 mainly includes a rotation guide pin 8273a.

The rotation guide pin 8273a is inserted through the rotation guide groove 8121a side of the elevation base member 8110 . The rotation guide pin 8273a has a substantially cylindrical shape. The rotation guide pin 8273a is arranged with its axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rotation guide pin 8273a is connected at its front end to the leading end of the arm 8273 in the extending direction. In this embodiment, the rotation guide pin 8273a has a substantially cylindrical bush having a flange portion with an outer diameter larger than the groove width of the rotation guide groove 8121a so as to suppress slipping out of the rotation guide groove 8121a. , is fixed to the rear end (see FIG. 78).

The blade portion 8280 shown in FIGS. 74, 75, 83, 84 and 87 is fixed so as to cover the blade portion side base portion 8240. As shown in FIG. The blade portion 8280 is mounted with light emitting means 8281a, which will be described later, and functions as a light emitting portion that emits light when light emission control is executed. The blade portion 8280 has a shape that imitates the blade of a sword. The blade portion 8280 mainly includes a substrate 8281 , a light guide member 8282 , a lens member 8283 and a cover member 8284 . 87 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 84 and schematically shows the blade portion 8280. As shown in FIG.

A substrate 8281 shown in FIGS. 82 to 84 is mounted with electronic components (functional components). The substrate 8281 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The substrate 8281 has a front surface as a mounting surface on which a light emitting means 8281a, which will be described later, is mounted. The board 8281 is attached to the front-facing side of the blade-side base portion 8240 .

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the substrate 8281 has substantially the same shape as the blade-side base portion 8240 when viewed from the front, and has a smaller area than the blade-side base portion 8240. is formed in

A light-emitting means 8281a shown in FIG. 87 emits light as a light source. The light emitting means 8281a is mounted on the mounting surface of the substrate 8281 facing forward. A plurality of light emitting units 8281a are arranged on the mounting surface of the substrate 8281 with a space therebetween. Various configurations can be adopted for the light emitting means 8281a. For example, the light emitting means 8281a may be an LED.

The light guide member 8282 guides the light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a. The light guide member 8282 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 8282 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The light guide member 8282 is arranged so as to cover the mounting surface side of the substrate 8281, and guides the light introduced from the light emitting means 8281a in the direction of the plate surface inside the light guide member 8282 to the outside of the light guide member 8282. derive

As shown in FIG. 82, in this embodiment, the light guide member 8282 has a shape substantially corresponding to the substrate 8281 when viewed from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 84, in this embodiment, the left end portion of the light guide member 8282 is formed as an inclined surface facing diagonally forward left. Further, the left end portion of the light guide member 8282 has an inclined surface shape along the rear surface of the lens member 8283 to be described later.

The lens member 8283 partially covers the blade side base portion 8240 , the substrate 8281 and the light guide member 8282 . The lens member 8283 is made of a transparent member. The lens member 8283 diffuses the light guided out from the light guide member 8282 . In this embodiment, the lens member 8283 is arranged so as to cover the left ends of the blade-side base portion 8240 , the substrate 8281 and the light guide member 8282 .

As shown in FIG. 84, the lens member 8283 is positioned outside (left side) of the outer edge (left edge) of the substrate 8281 from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281. deferred. The lens member 8283 extends to the rear side of the rearward facing surface of the substrate 8281 (the position beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281). In this embodiment, the lens member 8283 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the surface (the surface on the anti-light guide member 8282 side) facing obliquely forward left. In this embodiment, the lens member 8283 is arranged such that the left end of the lens member 8283 is located outside the left end of the substrate 8281 .

Further, in this embodiment, the blade-side base portion 8240 (base member 8210) is made of a reflecting member capable of reflecting light. The blade-side base portion 8240 reflects light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a, the light guide member 8282 and the lens member 8283. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 84, in this embodiment, the blade-side base portion 8240 extends so as to be positioned outside (left side) of the outer edge (left edge) of the substrate 8281 . In addition, the blade-side base portion 8240 is on the rear side of the rearward facing surface of the substrate 8281 (the position beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281), and reflects the light emitted from the lens member 8283. located where possible. In this embodiment, the front-facing surface of the left side portion of the blade-side base portion 8240 is positioned on the left side of the lens member 8283 so that the light emitted from the end (left end) of the lens member 8283 can be reflected. It is provided at a position facing the surface facing the rear side of the side portion. In addition, in this embodiment, the left end portion of the blade-side base portion 8240 is formed as an inclined surface facing diagonally forward left. In addition, the left end of the blade-side base portion 8240 is inclined along the back surface of the lens member 8283 .

The cover member 8284 shown in FIGS. 74, 75, 76 and 77 covers part of the blade side base portion 8240, the substrate 8281 and the light guide member 8282 together with the lens member 8283. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the cover member 8284 is arranged so as to cover the blade side base portion 8240, the substrate 8281 and the light guide member 8282 except for the portion where the lens member 8283 is arranged. Cover member 8284 is formed of an impermeable member. Further, in this embodiment, the lower end of the cover member 8284 is shaped like a flame. Also, the cover member 8284 mainly includes a translucent portion 8284a.

The translucent portion 8284a is made of a transmissive member. The translucent portion 8284a is arranged in the center of the cover member 8284 in the left-right direction. The translucent portion 8284 a may be made of the same material as the lens member 8283 .

Moreover, not only the blade portion 8280 described above, but also the handle portion 8250 and the collar portion 8260 may function as light emitting portions. In this case, the handle portion 8250 and the collar portion 8260 may be provided with a substrate, a light emitting means, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member in substantially the same manner as the blade side base portion 8240 .

Movement control of the second movable accessory unit 8000 configured as described above will be described below. In addition, below, the movement control which makes the movable light-emitting body 8200 made into the initial state into the production state is demonstrated.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the second movable character product unit 8000 is positioned on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. In the initial state shown in FIG. 75, the movable light emitter 8200 is positioned above the elevation base member 8110 . In addition, as shown in FIG. 85, in the initial state, the movable light emitting body 8200 has upper portions of the handle portion 8250 and the lever portion 8270 hidden behind the upper portion (decorative member 56) of the center accessory 7000. It is configured such that it is difficult to visually recognize from the

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 81, when the elevation motor 8130 of the elevation control means 8100 is driven, the output gear 8141, the first transmission gear 8142, and the intermediate transmission gear 8143 mesh with each other, and the second transmission gear 8144 rotates about its axis counterclockwise when viewed from the rear.

Rotation of the second transmission gear 8144 is transmitted to the rack portion 8222 meshing with the second transmission gear 8144 . The rack portion 8222 is sent downward as the second transmission gear 8144 rotates. The movable light emitter 8200 to which the rack portion 8222 is connected moves (falls) downward while being guided along the first guide groove 8111, the second guide groove 8112, and the third guide groove 8113 of the elevation base member 8110. .

In the present embodiment, the downward movement restriction of the movable light emitting body 8200 by the lock member 8160 is released during the movement control. The lock member 8160 is controlled to retract the lock portion 8161 during the movement control. As a result, the lock portion 8161 is released from the lock receiving portion 8222b provided on the movable light emitter 8200, and the movable light emitter 8200 can move downward. In addition, in the present embodiment, the movable light emitter 8200 moves downward against the upward biasing force of the biasing spring 8150 during the movement control.

Further, as the movable light emitter 8200 moves downward with respect to the elevation base member 8110, the rotation guide pin 8273a provided in the lever portion 8270 moves downward along the rotation guide groove 8121a of the elevation base member 8110. move to the side. As the downward movement of the movable light emitter 8200 progresses, the rotation guide pin 8273a is guided by the bent portion 8121b of the rotation guide groove 8121a. As a result, the lever portion 8270 rotates about the rotation shaft 8272 counterclockwise in rear view. As a result, the lever main body 8271 of the lever portion 8270 moves so that the distal end thereof approaches the handle portion 8250 side.

By performing the movement control as described above, the movable light emitting body 8200 is brought into an effect state. As shown in FIG. 79, the movable light emitter 8200 is positioned below the elevation base member 8110 in the effect state. Also, as shown in FIG. 86, in the effect state, the entire lever portion 8270 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

Further, when the movable light emitting body 8200 in the rendering state is brought into the initial state, movement control opposite to the movement control described above is executed. When the elevation motor 8130 is rotated in a direction opposite to the movement control described above, the driving of the elevation motor 8130 is transmitted to the elevation mechanism 8140, thereby moving (raising) the movable light emitter 8200 upward. In this embodiment, the movable light emitting body 8200 is biased upward by the biasing spring 8150, so that upward movement is assisted when the movable light emitter 8200 is raised. Further, in this embodiment, when the movable light emitter 8200 is brought to the initial state, the locking portion 8161 of the locking member 8160 is controlled to protrude. As a result, the lock receiving portion 8222b of the movable light emitter 8200 receives the lock portion 8161, thereby restricting the movable light emitter 8200 from falling.

As described above, the movable light-emitting body 8200 provides an effect that the player can visually recognize, thereby improving the game playability.

Also, the light emission control of the second movable accessory unit 8000 configured as described above will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 87, when the light emission control is executed, the light emitting means 8281a mounted on the substrate 8281 emits light. The light emitted from the light emitting means 8281 a enters the light guide member 8282 arranged on the front side of the substrate 8281 . In the figure, the light emitted by the light emitting means 8281a is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

Part of the light that enters (enters) the light guide member 8282 and enters the light guide member 8282 is divided into the light that passes through the light guide member 8282 and the surface of the light guide member 8282 (lens member 8283 side). and the light reflected against the surface of the surface). Another part of the light entering the light guide member 8282 is totally reflected inside the light guide member 8282 .

Specifically, of the light that enters the light guide member 8282, the incident angle with respect to the surface of the light guide member 8282 (the angle formed by the incident light and a line perpendicular to the surface in a cross-sectional view) ) is smaller than a predetermined angle, the light that passes through the light guide member 8282 and exits toward the base portion 8240 on the side opposite to the blade portion and the light that is reflected on the surface of the light guide member 8282 and travels toward the blade portion side and light emitted to the base portion 8240 side. In addition, of the light that enters the light guide member 8282 , light with an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided in the surface direction of the light guide member 8282 while repeating total reflection inside the light guide member 8282 .

Part of the light that enters (incidents) the lens member 8283 via the light guide member 8282 and enters the lens member 8283 is divided into the light that passes through the lens member 8283 and the surface of the lens member 8283 (reflecting light). and the light reflected on the surface on the side of the optical member 8282 . Another part of the light entering the lens member 8283 is totally reflected inside the lens member 8283 .

Specifically, of the light that enters the lens member 8283, the angle of incidence with respect to the surface of the lens member 8283 (the angle formed by the incident light and a line orthogonal to the surface in a cross-sectional view) is If the angle is smaller than the predetermined angle, the light that passes through the lens member 8283 and exits toward the anti-light guide member 8282 side and the light that is reflected on the surface of the lens member 8283 and is directed toward the light guide member 8282 side (blade portion side) and the light emitted to the base portion 8240 side). Further, of the light entering the lens member 8283 , light with an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the plane of the lens member 8283 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 8283 .

In addition, as described above, the light reflected by the lens member 8283 and the light guide member 8282 and emitted to the blade side base portion 8240 (reflecting member) is reflected by the blade side base portion 8240 and is reflected by the lens Light enters the member 8283 (light guide member 8282).

With the configuration as described above, the blade-side base portion 8240 made of a reflecting member capable of reflecting light is provided at a position capable of reflecting the light emitted from the end portion of the lens member 8283. The light reflected by the blade-side base portion 8240 can enter the lens member 8283 located on the back side of the mounting surface of the substrate 8281, to which the light from the light emitting means 8281a is difficult to reach. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in irradiation through.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lens member 8283 is arranged so that its surface faces obliquely forward. Thereby, the light from the lens member 8283 can be emitted to the front side facing the player.

Various light emission modes can be adopted for the light emission control described above. For example, the light emitting means 8281a may be lit or blinked as appropriate to emit light in a predetermined pattern.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, as in a second embodiment shown in FIG. You may form so that it may be located in an outer side (left side). The rearward surface of the left end portion of the lens member 8283 faces the frontward surface of the blade-side base portion 8240 with a gap therebetween.

Also in this embodiment, light emitted by the light emitting means 8281a enters the lens member 8283 via the light guide member 8282, as in the first embodiment described above. In the figure, the light emitted by the light emitting means 8281a is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. Part of the light that enters the lens member 8283 is divided into light that passes through the lens member 8283 and is reflected on the surface of the lens member 8283 (the surface on the anti-light guide member 8282 side). Another part of the light entering the lens member 8283 is totally reflected inside the lens member 8283 .

In this embodiment, the light guided toward the surface of the lens member 8283 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 8283 is emitted from the tip surface (the surface facing the rear at the left end) of the lens member 8283. , emit light toward the rear.

The light emitted rearward from the tip surface of the lens member 8283 is reflected toward the lens member 8283 by the front-facing surface of the left end of the blade-side base portion 8240, and enters the lens member 8283 again. .

Even in the game machine configured in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of uneven irradiation through the lens member 8283 . In addition, in this embodiment, the light emitted rearward from the tip surface of the lens member 8283 can be reflected by the forward surface of the left end portion of the blade-side base portion 8240 . As a result, the light emitted rearward from the tip surface of the lens member 8283 can be reflected forward toward the player, and the light can be emitted through the lens member 8283 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable light emitter 8200 is controlled to move up and down, but it is not limited to such a mode. Various directions can be adopted for the movement control of the movable light emitter 8200 .

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the movable light emitter 8200 is shaped like a sword, but the shape is not limited to this, and various shapes can be adopted.

For example, as in the third embodiment shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the movable light-emitting body 8900 may constitute an accessory imitating an arm with a hand and a wrist. The movable light emitter 8900 is controlled to move by the movement control means, and controlled to emit light by the light emission control means. In this embodiment, movable light emitter 8900 comprises fingers 8910 . Movable light emitter 8900 is provided with five fingers having a common configuration. One finger 8910 will be described below as an example.

The finger portion 8910 mainly includes a base member 8920, a substrate 8930, a light guide member 8940, a lens member 8950 and a cover member 8960.

A substrate 8930 shown in FIGS. 90 and 91 has a light emitting means 8931 mounted thereon, substantially similar to the substrate 8281 described above. The substrate 8930 is placed on a base member 8920 which will be described later. Also, the light emitting means 8931 emits light as a light source, substantially the same as the light emitting means 8281a described above.

The base member 8920 is formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light, substantially in the same manner as the blade-side base portion 8240 described above. The base member 8920 is provided so as to be positioned outside (on the side opposite to the substrate 8930) from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930, from the outer end portion (fingertip side end portion) of the substrate 8930. . In addition, the base member 8920 is provided at a position ahead of the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930 in the direction in which the rear surface faces (a position beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface). In the present embodiment, the base member 8920 has an inclined portion 8921 that is inclined toward the rear surface of the mounting surface as the fingertip side end portion thereof extends toward the tip side.

The light guide member 8940 guides the light emitted from the light emitting means 8931 in substantially the same manner as the light guide member 8282 described above. The light guide member 8940 is provided so as to be positioned outside (on the side opposite to the substrate 8930) from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930 to the outer end portion (fingertip side end portion) of the substrate 8930. there is Further, the light guide member 8940 is provided at a position on the front side of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930 in the direction in which the rear surface faces (a position beyond the mounting surface). In the present embodiment, the light guide member 8940 has an inclined portion 8941 that is inclined toward the rear surface of the mounting surface as the end portion on the fingertip side goes toward the tip side.

The lens member 8950 is provided so as to be positioned outside (on the side opposite to the substrate 8930) from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930 to the end of the substrate 8930 (end on the fingertip side). In addition, the lens member 8950 extends so as to be inclined to a position ahead of the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930 in the direction in which the rear surface faces (a position beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface). In this embodiment, the lens member 8950 has a fingertip-side end portion (a portion surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 91) formed as an inclined portion 8951 that is inclined toward the back side of the mounting surface toward the front side. ing.

The inclined portion 8951 of the lens member 8950 extends so as to be inclined in a manner different from the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 . In this embodiment, in a cross-sectional view, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 8951 of the lens member 8950 with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angles of the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 with respect to the horizontal plane. As a result, the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 are arranged such that the leading end side in the extending direction is close to the leading end side in the extending direction of the lens member 8950 .

The cover member 8960 is arranged so as to cover the light guide member 8940 together with the lens member 8950 in substantially the same manner as the cover member 8284 described above. Cover member 8960 is formed of an impermeable member.

Light emission control of the second movable accessory unit 8000 (movable light emitter 8900) configured as described above will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 91, when light emission control is executed, light emitting means 8931 mounted on substrate 8930 emits light. Light emitted from the light emitting means 8931 enters a light guide member 8940 arranged on the front side of the substrate 8930 . In the drawing, the light emitted from the light emitting means 8931 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

Part of the light that enters (incidents) the light guide member 8940 and enters the light guide member 8940 is divided into light that passes through the light guide member 8940 and the surface of the light guide member 8940 (lens member 8950 side). and the light reflected against the surface of the surface). Another part of the light entering the light guide member 8940 is totally reflected inside the light guide member 8940 .

Specifically, of the light that enters the light guide member 8940, the angle of incidence with respect to the surface of the light guide member 8940 (the angle formed by the incident light and a line perpendicular to the surface in a cross-sectional view) ) is smaller than a predetermined angle, the light that passes through the light guide member 8940 and is emitted toward the side opposite to the base member 8920 and the light that is reflected on the surface of the light guide member 8940 and is emitted toward the base member 8920 side. It is divided into light and light. In addition, of the light that enters the light guide member 8940 , light with an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided in the surface direction of the light guide member 8940 while repeating total reflection inside the light guide member 8940 .

Part of the light that enters (incidents) the lens member 8950 through the light guide member 8940 and enters the lens member 8950 is divided into the light that passes through the lens member 8950 and the surface of the lens member 8950 (reflecting light). and the light reflected on the surface on the side of the optical member 8940). Another part of the light entering the lens member 8950 is totally reflected inside the lens member 8950 .

Specifically, of the light that enters the lens member 8950, the angle of incidence with respect to the surface of the lens member 8950 (the angle formed by the incident light and a line orthogonal to the surface in a cross-sectional view) is If the angle is smaller than the predetermined angle, the light that passes through the lens member 8950 and exits toward the anti-light guide member 8940 side and the light that is reflected on the surface of the lens member 8950 and is reflected toward the light guide member 8940 side (the base member 8920 side). side) and the light emitted to the other side. Further, of the light entering the lens member 8950 , light with an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the plane of the lens member 8950 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 8950 .

In addition, as described above, the light reflected by the lens member 8950 and the light guide member 8940 and emitted toward the base member 8920 is reflected by the base member 8920 and enters the lens member 8950 (light guide member 8940) again. shine.

Further, in this embodiment, in a cross-sectional view, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 8951 of the lens member 8950 with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the inclination angle of the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 with respect to the horizontal plane. there is As a result, the leading end side in the extending direction of the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 approaches the leading end side of the inclined portion 8951 of the lens member 8950 in the extending direction. As a result, light enters through the light guide member 8940 and the base member 8920 from a position close to the distal end portion of the lens member 8950 in the extension direction, which is difficult for light to reach. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the irradiation.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the technology of a gaming machine equipped with an effect device that activates a role is publicly known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-47429).

The game machine described in the above publication includes a front movable performance accessory supported by a slide bar connected to a single drive source, and a first movable performance accessory rotatable at a predetermined angle in conjunction with the movement of the front movable presentation accessory. A game machine provided with a movable performance accessory is disclosed.

However, in such a game machine, the second movable body (first movable performance accessory) only moves in conjunction with the movement of the first movable body (front movable performance accessory), which lacks interest. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of a player.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A gaming machine comprising a first movable accessory unit 6000 capable of moving a movable body at a position visible to a player,
The first movable accessory unit 6000 is
A first movable mechanism 6100 (first movable mechanism) that drives the movable body, a second movable mechanism 6200 (second movable mechanism) different from the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movable mechanism 6100, and A third movable mechanism 6300 (third movable mechanism) different from the second movable mechanism 6200,
At least part of the movable body is
First movement control in which movement is controlled in a direction opposite to the first direction after movement in the first direction and in the first direction via the first movement path by the first movable mechanism 6100 When,
After the first movement control is executed in the first direction, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves to at least a partial area on the first movement path in a movement mode different from the first movement control. a second movement control controlled to move back via the second movement path;
After the second movement control is executed, third movement control in which movement is controlled by the third movable mechanism 6300 in a movement mode different from the first movement control and the second movement control;
is executable.

With such a configuration, the interest of the player can be enhanced. That is, by moving the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 by the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control, which are respectively different movement modes, , the movement of the movable body can be varied and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Also, in a state where the first movable mechanism 6100 is moved downward by the first movement control, the area through which the first movable mechanism 6100 passes becomes empty in the first movement path. In the second movement control and the third movement control, the second movable mechanism 6200 and the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved upward to the area through which the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed, and the Space can be used effectively.

Also, in a state in which the second movable mechanism 6200 is moved upward by the second movement control, the area through which the second movable mechanism 6200 passes becomes empty in the second movement path. In the third movement control, after the second movement control is executed, the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved downward to the region through which the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed, and the space inside the game machine can be moved downward. can be effectively used.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A gaming machine comprising a first movable accessory unit 6000 capable of moving a movable body at a position visible to a player,
The first movable accessory unit 6000 is
A first movable mechanism 6100 (first movable mechanism) that drives the movable body, a second movable mechanism 6200 (second movable mechanism) different from the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movable mechanism 6100, and A third movable mechanism 6300 (third movable mechanism) different from the second movable mechanism 6200,
At least part of the movable body is
First movement control in which movement is controlled in a direction opposite to the first direction after movement in the first direction and in the first direction via the first movement path by the first movable mechanism 6100 When,
After the first movement control is executed in the first direction, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves to at least a partial area on the first movement path in a movement mode different from the first movement control. a second movement control controlled to move back via the second movement path;
after the second movement control is executed, a third movement control in which movement is controlled on the first movement path by the third movable mechanism 6300;
is executable.

With such a configuration, the interest of the player can be enhanced. That is, by moving the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 by the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control, which are respectively different movement modes, , the movement of the movable body can be varied and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Also, in a state in which the second movable mechanism 6200 is moved upward by the second movement control, the area through which the second movable mechanism 6200 passes becomes empty in the second movement path. In the third movement control, after the second movement control is executed, the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved downward to the region through which the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed, and the space inside the game machine can be moved downward. can be effectively used.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A gaming machine comprising a first movable accessory unit 6000 capable of moving a movable body at a position visible to a player,
The first movable accessory unit 6000 is
A first movable mechanism 6100 (first movable mechanism) that drives the movable body, a second movable mechanism 6200 (second movable mechanism) different from the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movable mechanism 6100 and the a third movable mechanism 6300 (third movable mechanism) different from the second movable mechanism 6200,
At least part of the movable body is
First movement control in which movement is controlled in a direction opposite to the first direction after movement in the first direction and in the first direction via the first movement path by the first movable mechanism 6100 When,
After the first movement control is executed in the first direction, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves to at least a partial area on the first movement path in a movement mode different from the first movement control. a second movement control controlled to move back via the second movement path;
After the second movement control is executed, the third movable mechanism 6300 controls movement to a region on the first movement path and other than the second movement path by the second movement control. 3 movement control;
is executable.

With such a configuration, the interest of the player can be enhanced. That is, by moving the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 by the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control, which are respectively different movement modes, The movement of the movable body can be varied, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Also, in a state where the first movable mechanism 6100 is moved downward by the first movement control, the area through which the first movable mechanism 6100 passes becomes empty in the first movement path. In the second movement control and the third movement control, the second movable mechanism 6200 and the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved upward to the area through which the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed, and the Space can be used effectively.

Note that the first movable mechanism 6100 is one form of the first movable mechanism.
Also, the second movable mechanism 6200 is one form of the second movable mechanism.
Also, the third movable mechanism 6300 is one form of the third movable mechanism.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the embodiments, the movable body imitates an arm having a hand and a wrist.

Also, the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control are not limited to the aspects described above. For example, the order of each movement control may be changed as appropriate. Also, each movement control may be repeated as appropriate.

Although the first direction is the downward direction in the present embodiment, it is not limited to such a mode. Various directions can be adopted for the first direction.

Further, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a game ball sorting device capable of allocating game balls flowing down a game area to a first path and a second path different from the first path is provided. The technique is publicly known (see JP-A-2006-130126).

The above publication discloses a technique of distributing the flowing game balls to the first slope and the second slope on the center accessory by means of a movable piece that moves between the retracted position and the appearing position according to the extension and contraction of the plunger of the solenoid. It is In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the movable piece is driven frequently for a long period of time, the spring that returns to the retracted position when not energized deteriorates, and the solenoid main body and the plunger cannot return to the retracted position properly. The contact surface of the plunger is scratched and rattles, the dust generated by scraping of the member hardens and the plunger does not expand and contract well, and the dust generated when the movable piece rubs against the passage member hardens and does not work well. was there.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions in the operation of movable pieces.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls flow down;
a game ball sorting device 7200 capable of allocating game balls flowing down the game area 20 to a first path (advantageous course) and a second path (unfavorable course) different from the first path;
A gaming machine comprising
The game ball sorting device 7200 is
a movable piece 7220 (game ball distribution member) movable between a first position for guiding game balls to the first path and a second position for guiding game balls to the second path;
an electric driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220;
connection means (long hole 7222a and protrusion 7231) for connecting the movable piece 7220 and the electric driving means;
including
The electrical drive means are
When the flapper 7230 (driving unit) connected to the connecting means is in a first state in which the movable piece 7220 is in the first position in the energized state, and in the non-energized state in the first state, It is characterized in that the movable piece 7220 shifts to the second state, which is the second position, by its own weight.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the occurrence of malfunctions in the operation of the movable piece.

Specifically, the drive section (flapper 7230) is configured to move to a position where the movable piece closes the communication hole by its own weight. Therefore, a spring for moving the driving part to the position is not required. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the spring from deteriorating and preventing it from returning to the retracted position.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls flow down;
Game balls flowing down the game area 20 are distributed to a first passage (advantageous course) and a second passage (unfavorable course) different from the first passage via an upper passage 7030 (guiding passage). possible game ball distribution device 7200,
A gaming machine comprising
The upper passage 7030 is
comprising a communication hole 7031 communicating with the first passage,
The game ball sorting device 7200 is
A movable piece 7220 (game ball distribution member) provided to be swingable around an axis (first pin 7211) provided at a position separated from the upper passage 7030;
an electric driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220;
including
The movable piece 7220 is
By swinging downward, the communication hole 7031 is separated from the communication hole 7031, and the communication hole 7031 is opened. By moving, the communication hole 7031 is closed by approaching the communication hole 7031, and by closing the communication hole 7031, the game ball is guided to the second path. At the same time, even when it moves to the second position, it is kept in a non-contact state with the first passage, and can be moved from the first position to the second position by the weight of the movable piece 7220 itself. It is characterized by being

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the occurrence of malfunctions in the operation of the movable piece.

Specifically, since the swing shaft (first pin 7211) of the movable piece 7220 is provided apart from the upper passage 7030, the swing shaft (first pin 7211) and the upper passage 7030 No sliding. Also, the movable piece 7220 is configured to close or open the communication hole 7031 by moving toward or away from the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030 instead of sliding thereon. Therefore, the movable piece 7220 and the upper passage 7030 do not slide. In this way, since there are very few sliding parts, it is possible to prevent the generation of dust due to scraping of the member due to sliding, and consequently to suppress the occurrence of troubles in the operation of the movable piece.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls flow down;
a game ball sorting device 7200 capable of allocating game balls flowing down the game area 20 to a first path (advantageous course) and a second path (unfavorable course) different from the first path;
a main control circuit 100 (control unit) that controls the game ball sorting device 7200;
A gaming machine comprising
The game ball sorting device 7200 is
a movable piece 7220 (game ball distribution member) movable between a first position for guiding game balls to the first path and a second position for guiding game balls to the second path;
an electric driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220;
including
The flapper 7230 (drive unit) of the electric drive means is
In the energized state, the movable piece 7220 is in the first state in which the movable piece 7220 is in the first position, and in the non-energized state in the first state, the movable piece 7220 is in the second state in the second state. by its own weight,
The main control circuit 100 is
The operation of the movable piece 7220 is controlled by switching between the energized state and the non-energized state of the electric drive means, and the electric drive means is energized at a predetermined cycle. .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the occurrence of malfunctions in the operation of the movable piece.

Specifically, the main CPU 101 constantly drives the solenoid 7250 (the opening timing of 0.5 seconds and the closing timing of 1.5 seconds are always alternately repeated). Such a setting can be said to be a state in which troubles in the operation of the movable piece are likely to occur. However, since the drive section (flapper 7230) is configured to move to the position where the movable piece closes the communication hole by its own weight, a spring for moving the drive section to the position is not required. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the spring from deteriorating and preventing it from returning to the retracted position.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls flow down;
A crew 7100 (game ball guidance device) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the device from the game area 20 to follow a predetermined trajectory;
A game ball distribution device 7200 capable of distributing game balls flowing down from the croon 7100 to a first passage (advantageous course) and a second passage (unfavorable course) different from the first passage,
A gaming machine comprising
The Kroon 7100 is
a guiding portion 7110 for guiding game balls flowing in from the outside;
A rolling part 7120 on which a game ball can roll,
including
The guiding portion 7110 has a bottom portion 7112 and a pair of side wall portions 7113 rising from both ends of the bottom portion 7112,
The rolling part 7120 is
A bottom portion 7121 (rolling area) on which a game ball can roll,
a guide wall 7122 that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the guide portion 7110;
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge portion) that can discharge the game ball,
including
The guide wall 7122 is
The connection portion with one side wall portion (rear side wall portion 7113b) of the guide portion 7110 is used as a starting point so that the game ball that has flowed in and rolls while contacting the guide wall 7122 takes a circular trajectory. (front wall portion 7113a) is formed in an annular shape with the terminal point being the connection portion,
At the starting point of the guide wall 7122, a bulging portion 7122a is provided for buffering the collision between the guide wall 7122 and the game ball rolling in a circular orbit.
The game ball sorting device 7200 is
Movable movable between a first position for guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge hole 7123a of the croon 7100 to the first passage and a second position for guiding the game ball to the second passage. Piece 7220 (game ball distribution member),
an electric driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220;
including
The flapper 7230 (drive unit) of the electric drive means is
In the energized state, the movable piece 7220 is in the first state in which the movable piece 7220 is in the first position, and in the non-energized state in the first state, the movable piece 7220 is in the second state in the second state. It is characterized by shifting to by its own weight.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game machine equipped with a game ball guiding device capable of suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions in the operation of the movable piece and appropriately rotating (rolling) the game ball. can do.

Further, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there is known a technique of providing a game ball guidance device for guiding a game ball flowing into the machine from the game area to take a predetermined trajectory (2006-2006). 115899).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a croon provided with a rolling guide surface that is inclined at a predetermined angle from a through hole provided in the center of the croon toward a side wall around the croon. In this way, it is possible to impart randomness to the rolling time of the game ball.

However, in the above-described conventional pachinko machine, the game ball that has made one round while contacting the inner wall of the croon leaves the inner wall once at the inflow port, passes through the inflow port, and touches the inner wall again. There was a problem that it would be repelled and smooth rotation would be hindered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine having a game ball guide device capable of smoothly rotating (rolling) a game ball.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls flow down;
A crew 7100 (game ball guidance device) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the device from the game area 20 to follow a predetermined trajectory;
A gaming machine comprising
The Kroon 7100 is
a guiding portion 7110 for guiding game balls flowing in from the outside;
A rolling part 7120 on which a game ball can roll,
including
The guiding portion 7110 has a bottom portion 7112 and a pair of side wall portions 7113 rising from both ends of the bottom portion 7112,
The rolling part 7120 is
A bottom portion 7121 (rolling area) on which a game ball can roll,
a guide wall 7122 that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the guide portion 7110;
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge portion) that can discharge the game ball,
including
The guide wall 7122 is
The connection portion with one side wall portion (rear side wall portion 7113b) of the guide portion 7110 is used as a starting point so that the game ball that has flowed in and rolls while contacting the guide wall 7122 takes a circular trajectory. (front wall portion 7113a) is formed in an annular shape with the terminal point being the connection portion,
At the connecting portion between the guide portion 7110 and the rolling portion 7120, a stepped portion 7130 is provided such that the bottom portion 7121 of the rolling portion 7120 is lower than the bottom portion 7112 of the guide portion 7110,
The stepped portion 7130 is
The height of the stepped portion 7130 is made equal to or less than the radius of the game ball, and the game ball rolling beyond the end point of the guide wall 7122 takes substantially the same orbit as the circular orbit on which it has rolled so far. It is formed in an annular shape from the end point of the guide wall 7122 to the start point of the guide wall 7122,
A bulging portion 7122a is provided at the starting point of the guide wall 7122 to cushion the collision between the game ball rolling along the stepped portion 7130 and the guide wall 7122. is.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a game ball guiding device that can smoothly rotate (roll) a game ball.

Specifically, since the swelling portion 7122a is provided at the starting point portion of the guide wall 7122 of the croon 7100, the game ball hits the guide wall 7122 smoothly at an angle nearly parallel to the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 can be brought into contact. Therefore, the game ball is not repelled by the guide wall 7122, and thus the game ball A can be prevented from being immediately discharged to the outside from the discharge hole 7123a.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the game balls flowing into the croon uniformly follow the same trajectory, the time from when the game ball flows into the croon until it falls through the through hole is a fixed rule. There was a problem that I had sexuality and was targeted.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine equipped with a game ball guiding device capable of widening the range of randomness of the rolling time of a game ball.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls flow down;
A crew 7100 (game ball guidance device) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the device from the game area 20 to follow a predetermined trajectory;
A gaming machine comprising
The Kroon 7100 is
a guiding portion 7110 for guiding game balls flowing in from the outside;
A rolling part 7120 on which a game ball can roll,
including
The rolling part 7120 is
A bottom portion 7121 (rolling area) on which a game ball can roll,
a guide wall 7122 that guides the game ball flowing in from the guide part 7110 so that the game ball follows a circular orbit;
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge portion) that can discharge the game ball,
including
The discharge hole 7123a is
It is characterized in that it is formed as an inverted conical hole whose diameter decreases toward the bottom.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game machine equipped with a game ball guiding device capable of widening the range of randomness of the rolling time of a game ball.

Specifically, since the discharge hole 7123a is formed in an inverted conical shape, the rotational speed of the game ball is less likely to drop. Therefore, the maximum time until the game ball is discharged from the discharge hole 7123a can be lengthened without increasing the size of the croon 7100. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of randomness of the rolling time of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to target the timing when the communication hole 7031 is closed.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls flow down;
A crew 7100 (game ball guidance device) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the device from the game area to follow a predetermined trajectory;
A gaming machine comprising
The Kroon 7100 is
a guiding portion 7110 for guiding game balls flowing in from the outside;
A rolling part 7120 on which a game ball can roll,
including
The guiding portion 7110 has a bottom portion 7112 and a pair of side wall portions 7113 rising from both ends of the bottom portion 7112,
The rolling part 7120 is
A bottom portion 7121 (rolling area) on which a game ball can roll,
a guide wall 7122 that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the guide portion 7110;
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge portion) that can discharge the game ball,
including
The guide wall 7122 is
The connection portion with one side wall portion (rear side wall portion 7113b) of the guide portion 7110 is used as a starting point so that the game ball that has flowed in and rolls while contacting the guide wall 7122 takes a circular trajectory. (front wall portion 7113a) is formed in an annular shape with the terminal point being the connection portion,
At the starting point of the guide wall 7122, a bulging portion 7122a is provided for buffering the collision between the guide wall 7122 and the game ball rolling in a circular orbit.
The discharge hole 7123a is
It is characterized in that it is formed as an inverted conical hole whose diameter decreases toward the bottom.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game machine equipped with a game ball guiding device capable of widening the range of randomness of the rolling time of a game ball.

Specifically, since the swelling portion 7122a is provided at the starting point portion of the guide wall 7122 of the croon 7100, the game ball hits the guide wall 7122 smoothly at an angle nearly parallel to the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 can be brought into contact. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the rotation speed of the game ball. Furthermore, since the discharge hole 7123a is formed in an inverted conical shape, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the rotation speed of the game ball. Therefore, the maximum time until the game ball is discharged from the discharge hole 7123a can be lengthened without increasing the size of the croon 7100. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of randomness of the rolling time of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to target the timing when the communication hole 7031 is closed.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is set so that the opening timing of 0.5 seconds and the closing timing of 1.5 seconds are always repeated. The timing time can be set to any suitable value.

Also, the shapes of the movable piece 7220 and the flapper 7230 of the game ball distribution device 7200 are not limited as long as they can exhibit the effects of the present invention.

Conventionally, the technique of a game machine having a decoration device (movable accessory unit) capable of executing an effect visible to a player is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-143403).

The gaming machine described in the above publication has a configuration in which a lamp substrate on which a light source is mounted is accommodated in a lens cover attached to a front frame of the decoration device, and light from the light source is emitted to the outside through the lens cover. Equipped with an illumination device that

However, in such a game machine, it is difficult for the light from the light source to reach the lens cover, which is located on the back side of the lamp substrate in the decoration device, rather than the lamp substrate, and the irradiation through the lens cover is uneven. There was a problem.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing unevenness in irradiation through a lens member in a decoration device.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A gaming machine equipped with a second movable accessory unit 8000 (decorative device) capable of executing an effect visible to the player,
The second movable accessory unit 8000 is
a light emitting means 8281a;
a substrate 8281 on which the light emitting means 8281a is mounted;
a base member 8210 on which the substrate 8281 is mounted;
A lens member 8283 formed of a transparent member and arranged at a position where light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a can enter,
The lens member 8283 is
From the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281, the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281 outside at least one end (left end) of the substrate 8281. extended to a position exceeding
The base member 8210 is
At a position formed of a reflecting member capable of reflecting light, outside at least one end (left end) of the substrate 8281, and beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281 It is provided at a position where light emitted from the end (left end) of the lens member 8283 can be reflected.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress unevenness in irradiation via the lens member 8283 in the second movable accessory unit 8000 . That is, since the base member 8210 formed of a reflecting member capable of reflecting light is provided at a position capable of reflecting the light emitted from the end of the lens member 8283, the light from the light emitting means 8281a does not easily reach the substrate. The light reflected by the base member 8210 can also enter the lens member 8283 positioned on the back side of the mounting surface of the 8281, and it is possible to suppress unevenness in the irradiation through the lens member 8283. can.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment
A gaming machine comprising a second movable accessory unit 8000 capable of executing an effect visible to a player,
The second movable accessory unit 8000 is
a light emitting means 8931;
a substrate 8930 on which the light emitting means 8931 is mounted;
a light guide member 8940 that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means 8931;
a base member 8920 on which the substrate 8930 is mounted;
a lens member 8950 formed of a transparent member and arranged at a position where light emitted from the light emitting means 8931 through the light guide member 8940 can enter;
The lens member 8950 is
From the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930, to the outside of at least one end (fingertip side end) of the substrate 8930 and on the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930 It extends so as to incline to a position beyond the back surface,
The light guide member 8940 is
From the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930, to the outside of at least one end (fingertip side end) of the substrate 8930 and on the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930 It extends beyond the rear surface and is inclined in a manner different from that of the lens member 8950 so as to be close to the distal end side of the lens member 8950 in the extending direction.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress unevenness in irradiation via the lens member 8950 in the second movable accessory unit 8000 (decorative device). That is, by allowing light to enter through the light guide member 8940 from a position close to the tip portion in the extension direction of the lens member 8950, which is difficult for light to reach, irradiation through the lens member 8950 is uneven. You can prevent it from happening.

[spec]
Next, the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be explained using FIG.

FIG. 92 shows an outline of (game) specs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 92, "special figure 1" indicates, for example, the winning of the first starting opening (the starting opening 7071a of the starting opening unit 7070 shown in FIG. 42 and the base plate side advantageous outward route 7072b). In addition, "special figure 2" indicates, for example, winning a prize to the second start opening (the second start opening 440 of the normal electric accessory 460 shown in FIG. 26). In the following description, the winning to the first start opening may be simply referred to as "special figure 1", and the winning to the second starting opening may simply be referred to as "special figure 2".

As shown in FIG. 92, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is set to 1/199.8. Also, in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is set to 1/24. Also, the small hit probability is set to 1/24 in the special figure 2. Thus, the probability of a small hit based on the special figure 2 is set to be the same as the probability of a big hit based on the special figure 2. In addition, the continuation rate is set to 10% in the special figure 1, and is set to 95% in the special figure 2. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of times of continuation of the variable probability state executed after the end of the big hit is limited (limit), and in the present embodiment, it is 10 times. When the limit number of times is reached, even if a big hit occurs in the probability variable pattern, the state is not shifted to the probability variable state after the big win is completed. For example, in the case of a game machine (so-called V-variable machine) that shifts to a variable state after the big hit by the displacement member being released during the big hit of the variable probability symbol (symbol easy to pass through the specific area) and the game ball passing through the specific area. , When the current big win reaches the limit number of times, even if it passes through a specific area during the big win, it is treated as a normal big win and does not shift to a variable probability state after the big win is finished.

In addition, as a real round (hit type), in the special figure 1, a 5R (normal) jackpot is selected with a probability of 90% (5 rounds of jackpot games are performed, and after the jackpot game short-time state). Similarly, a 5R (probability variable) jackpot is selected with a probability of 10% (5 rounds of jackpot games are performed, and after the jackpot game, the probability/time saving state is entered).

Also, in the special figure 2, 4R (normal) jackpot is selected with a probability of 5% (4 rounds of jackpot games are performed, and after the jackpot games, the game becomes non-probability variable/time-saving state). Similarly, a 4R (probability variable) jackpot is selected with a probability of 45% (4 rounds of jackpot games are performed, and after the jackpot game, the probability variable state/time saving state is selected). Similarly, a 6R (probability variable) jackpot is selected with a probability of 10% (6 rounds of jackpot games are performed, and after the jackpot game, a probability variable/time saving state is entered). Similarly, the 8R (variable probability) jackpot is selected with a probability of 40% (8 rounds of jackpot games are played, and after the jackpot game, the probability variable/time saving state is entered). It should be noted that below, it may be referred to as "fall" to become a 4R (normal) jackpot of the special figure 2 in the probability variation / time saving state, and to become a non-variability / time saving state after the big hit game.

Thus, in the present embodiment (second embodiment), even when the special figure 1 hits (that is, when the hit is hit when left-handed), the hit It is relatively difficult to enter a probability variable/time saving state after a game. However, once it becomes a probability variable / time saving state and becomes a big hit of special figure 2 (that is, while hitting to the right), the probability variable / time saving state is set to be relatively long and easy to continue.

It should be noted that the number of continuations of the variable probability state is added (stored) by a predetermined counter that the main control circuit 100 has. The main control circuit 100, in the above-described special symbol determination processing, once the non-variable probability state changes to the variable probability state, starts counting, and performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the counter each time a variable probability big hit occurs. In this way, when the added value becomes 10, the main control circuit 100 determines that the limit has been reached, and shifts from the probability variable/time-saving state to the non-probability variable/time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, the value of the counter is cleared when the probability variation/time saving state is shifted to the non-probability variation/time saving state.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, various effects are performed in relation to reaching the limit. Therefore, not only the main control circuit 100 but also the sub-control circuit 200 needs to acquire information as to whether or not the limit has been reached. The sub-control circuit 200 may acquire the information as to whether or not the limit has been reached from the main control circuit 100, or may acquire the information by itself having a counter and counting.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a game (hereinafter referred to as a "JAC game") intended to improve the interest of the player is played. JAC game is a game that is performed when the probability variable state occurs continuously, for example, in the above-mentioned V probability variable machine, a big hit occurs in special figure 1 or special figure 2, and a specific area is played during the big hit As long as the game ball passes, the JAC game after the big win is continued. In this case, the effect mode during the JAC game may differ depending on whether the big hit is the special figure 1 or the big hit is the special figure 2. A detailed description of the JAC game will be given later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the number of time reductions determined based on the type of jackpot and the type of variation pattern used in the game after the jackpot ends will be described.

FIG. 93 shows a table (variation pattern table selection table) for selecting the number of time reductions and a variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is used when a variation pattern is determined (selected) by the main CPU 101 in step S121 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 93, in this embodiment, variation pattern A is used in the case of 5R (normal) of special figure 1 in FIG. In addition, in the case of a 4R (normal) jackpot in special figure 2, the variation pattern table A is used. Also, in the case of a special figure 1 5R (probability variation), a special figure 2 4R (probability variation), a special figure 2 6R (probability variation), or a special figure 2 8R (probability variation), (in principle ) Fluctuation pattern table B is used. However, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the big hit of the probability variation pattern (specific area passage easy pattern), the variation pattern A is used.

Also, in the case of special figure 2 4R (probability variation), special figure 2 6R (probability variation), or special figure 2 8R (probability variation), when reaching the limit described later, the variation pattern table C is used as an exception. be. In addition, the number of times of time reduction is 100 times for 5R (normal) of special figure 1, and 5R (variable probability) of special figure 1 is until the next big hit. However, when the limit number of times is reached, the number of times of time saving becomes 100 times. Also, if 4R (normal) is won during the JAC game, the number of times of time saving will be 20 times.
In addition, even in the same variation pattern table, these variation pattern tables A, B, and C are likely to select a long-time variation pattern for the variation pattern related to the special figure 1, and for the variation pattern related to the special figure 2, a short period It is a configuration that makes it easy to select the variation pattern of .
In addition, after the time saving state is completed and the state returns to the normal state, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table D for the normal game.

Thus, the variation pattern is selected by the main CPU 101 using each variation pattern table as described above. Although detailed description is omitted, each variation pattern table defines a plurality of variation patterns, and one variation pattern is determined from the plurality of variation patterns by the winning result and the random number for selecting the variation pattern. be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern table C is used, the first variation after reaching the limit (at the time of the first variation display of the symbol) has a longer variation pattern (for example, 13 seconds) is selected. After reaching the limit, not only when using the fluctuation pattern table C as described above, but also when using other fluctuation pattern tables (for example, fluctuation pattern table D etc.), 1 after reaching the limit A longer variation pattern is selected for the first variation than for the second and subsequent variations. In addition, hereinafter, the long variation pattern of the first variation after reaching these limits may be referred to as "variation pattern LG".

Next, processing by the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Components (processes) that are the same as or similar to those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Here, among the processes shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the effect pattern determination process in step S1408, the winning start effect determination process in step S1410, the inter-round effect determination process in step S1414, and the winning end effect determination in step S1416. The processing will be explained.

First, the effect pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 94(a).

In step S1431, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of effect pattern determination. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, which is data indicating the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101, the stop symbol, and the extracted random number for determining the effect. I do.

When the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is the variation pattern LG, the sub-CPU 201 determines an effect pattern based on the variation pattern LG. Specifically, an effect pattern including an EX mode transition effect, which will be described later, is determined as the effect pattern. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1432.

In step S1432, the sub CPU 201 performs processing of setting effect data corresponding to the determined effect pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the production pattern determination process.

Next, the winning start effect determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. 94(b).

In step S1434, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining the winning start effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a winning start effect according to the received winning start command or the like. The winning start effect includes an opening (OP) effect, which will be described later. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1435.

In step S1435, the sub CPU 201 performs processing of setting effect data corresponding to the determined winning start effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the winning start effect determination process.

Next, the inter-round effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 95(a).

In step S1437, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect between rounds. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an inter-round effect according to the received inter-round display command or the like. Note that the inter-round effect includes a round continuation effect, which will be described later. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1438.

In step S1438, the sub CPU 201 performs processing of setting effect data corresponding to the determined inter-round effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the inter-round effect determination process.

Next, the winning end effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 95(b).

In step S1441, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining the winning end effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the winning end effect according to the received winning end display command or the like. In addition, the hit end display command is set when the hit type is JAC4 described later (when the limit is reached) and the hit end display command is set when the hit type is other than JAC4 (limit not reached time) winning end display command and .

In this way, different winning end effects are determined according to the winning end effect command when the limit is reached or when the limit is not reached. In this embodiment, the winning end effect includes the result display effect determined according to the winning end display command when the limit is reached, and the first ending effect determined according to the winning end display command when the limit is not reached. and are included. Note that the result display effect and the first ending effect will be described later. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1442.

In step S1442, the sub CPU 201 performs processing of setting effect data corresponding to the determined winning end effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the winning end effect determination process.

[JAC game]
Next, the JAC game will be described in detail.

First, with reference to FIG. 96, the types of hits in the JAC game performed when the game state is the variable probability/time saving state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the present embodiment, JAC1, JAC2, JAC3, JAC4, ramming action, and S-JAC are provided as hit types to be selected during the JAC game. The "symbol/icon" shown in FIG. 96 indicates the contents displayed to inform the player of the kind of winning when playing a jackpot game in the JAC game. Further, the "corresponding symbol" specifically indicates a symbol corresponding to the winning type of the name shown in FIG.

Each hit is first selected by the main CPU 101, 4R (variable probability), 6R (variable probability), 8R (variable probability), and then by the sub CPU 201, in the case of 8R (variable probability), basically JAC1 or JAC2 is determined by lottery, but if another 8R (probability variation) is stored in the hold, it is determined to JAC3, and when the limit is reached, it is determined to JAC4. In the case of 6R (variable probability) or 4R (variable probability), JAC1 is basically determined, but JAC4 is determined when the limit is reached. Also, when the main CPU 101 selects 4R (normal), the sub CPU 201 decides on a hitting motion. Also, when the main CPU 101 selects a small win, the sub CPU 201 determines S-JAC.
Thus, when the hit type is JAC1, 7 (blue) is displayed as a pattern/icon (hereinafter simply referred to as "icon"), 8R (variable probability), 6R (variable probability) or 4R (variable probability) ) indicates that it is a big hit. Also, when the hit type is JAC2, 7 (red) is displayed as an icon, indicating that it is an 8R (variable probability) jackpot.

Further, when the hit type is JAC3, V is displayed as an icon, indicating that it is an 8R (variable probability) jackpot. In addition, as described in "Remarks", if it is JAC3, it basically corresponds to 8R (variable probability), but at the time when the variable display (symbol) related to this JAC3 starts The big hit of 8R (variable probability) is also confirmed. In this embodiment, when the two 8R (variable probability) jackpots are confirmed in this way, even if there is another hold between the two 8R (variable probability) jackpots, the two 8R ( A series of 16R (variable probability) big hits are produced (second look-ahead production described later).

Also, when the hit type is JAC4, 7 (yellow) is displayed as an icon, indicating that the jackpot is one of 8R (variable probability), 6R (variable probability) or 4R (variable probability). It should be noted that, as described in "Remarks", JAC4 appears when the limit is reached (the continuation count is the 10th jackpot). That is, in this case, even if the specific area is passed during the big hit of the probability variable pattern (specific area easy passage pattern), the probability variable/time saving state does not occur after the big win game, but the non-probability variable/time saving state is entered. Thus, when the hit type is JAC4, after the jackpot game, the JAC game (probability variable/time saving state) is shifted to a non-probability variable/time saving state game (hereinafter referred to as "EX game"). It should be noted that the EX game started when the limit is completed is played 100 times at maximum (unless a big hit is achieved).

Also, if the type of hit is a hit action, the icon is not displayed, and the fact that the hit is a 4R (normal) jackpot is not indicated again. More specifically, when the winning type is a hitting action, the big winning opening 540 is opened four times for a short period of time (for example, 1.7 seconds), and an effect related to the change of the game state (mode transition effect). is done. In addition, when the hit type is a hit action, after the big hit game, the JAC game (probability change / time saving state) is shifted to the EX game (non-probability change / time saving state) (that is, it falls). It should be noted that the EX game that is started when the player falls is played 20 times at maximum (if the player does not win a big hit).

Also, when the hit type is S-JAC, S-JAC is displayed as an icon to indicate that it is a small hit. In addition, when a small winning game is performed, the big winning opening 540 is opened once for a short period of time (for example, 1.7 seconds). A plurality of types of small wins may be provided, and the opening time and opening pattern may be different for each small win.

Next, the screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the variable display during the JAC game will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 97 shows an example of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the variable display is being executed during the JAC game (that is, variable probability/time saving state). A plurality of display areas are provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in order to display various effects and information. Specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a mini symbol display area 1001 , a limit number display area 1002 , a GC display area 1003 , and a JAC number display area 1004 .

The mini symbol display area 1001 is an area for displaying a variable display of identification symbols. The mini-symbol display area 1001 is located in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . The identification pattern displayed in the mini pattern display area 1001 is smaller than the game state (non-probability variable/non-time-saving state) before the start of the JAC game, and deviates from the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A variable display is performed at a position (that is, in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize) (for example, see FIG. 128 described later).

The number-of-limits display area 1002 is an area for displaying the total number of probability variable jackpot games that have been played up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game. A limit number display area 1002 is formed in a semicircular shape. A total of 10 circular lighting units 1005 are displayed in the limit count display area 1002 . One lighting unit 1005 is lit at the start of the JAC game, and the color of one lighting unit 1005 is changed to white each time a big win game is played. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the image displayed in the number-of-limits display area 1002 indicates that seven jackpot games have been played up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game.

The GC display area 1003 is an area for displaying the total number of variable displays (total number of games) that have been performed up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game. The GC display area 1003 is located inside the limit number display area 1002 formed in a semicircular shape. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the image displayed in the GC display area 1003 indicates that the variable display has been performed 324 times up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game.

The JAC number display area 1004 is an area for displaying the total number of JACs that have been played up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game. Incidentally, the number of JAC means the number of times the big winning opening 540 is opened in the big winning game and the small winning game. That is, the JAC number means the number of round games (specifically, for example, 8 times if it is 8R (variable probability)) in the big hit game, and means 1 time in the small hit game. In addition, the number of JAC is not the number of times the large winning opening 540 is opened in the big winning game and the small winning game, but the number of times of the big winning game and the small winning game (that is, the number of times the winning game is performed). good too. It should be noted that, as a small winning game, it is desirable to set the number of JACs to 1 even when the game is opened for 0.9 seconds×2 times, for example.

The JAC number display area 1004 is located in the upper right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . In the example shown in FIG. 97, the image displayed in the number-of-JACs display area 1004 indicates that the total number of JACs has reached 35 since the start of the current JAC game.

In this way, during the JAC game, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the variable display is being performed has various display areas to display various information related to the JAC game, in addition to the variable display of identification symbols. (Specifically, the total number of jackpot games, the total number of fluctuation displays, and the total number of JAC numbers) are displayed. As a result, the player can play the game while grasping the information about the JAC game while the variable display is being performed during the JAC game. In addition to the various information described above, the number of payouts may be displayed.

In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a background screen and a predetermined character are displayed in addition to the variable display of identification patterns and information about the JAC game. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 97, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays two characters battling.

Next, a screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the jackpot game is being executed in the JAC game will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 98 is a liquid crystal display during a jackpot game (more specifically, a jackpot round period to be described later) when a jackpot (specifically, an 8R (probability variation) jackpot) is achieved during a JAC game. An example of a screen displayed on the device 16 is shown. A plurality of display areas are provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in order to display various effects and information. Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a JAC pattern display area 1010, a remaining round display area 1011, and a JAC number display area 1004 are provided.

The JAC symbol display area 1010 is an area for displaying the name of the hit type and the JAC symbol (icon). The JAC pattern display area 1010 is located in the upper left part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . In the example shown in FIG. 98, an image (that is, an icon) displayed in the JAC symbol display area 1010 indicates that the hit type of the big hit is JAC1.

The remaining round display area 1011 is an area for displaying the number of remaining rounds (that is, the remaining number of times the big winning opening 540 is opened in the current jackpot game). The remaining round display area 1011 is located in the lower left part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . The number of JAC displays 1012 corresponding to the number of remaining rounds is displayed in the remaining round display area 1011 . For example, in the example shown in FIG. 97, it is displayed that the number of remaining rounds is 8 immediately after the start of the 8R (variable probability) jackpot. Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 98, the JAC display 1012 is erased each time the big winning opening 540 is opened once (one round is completed) from now on.

The JAC number display area 1004 is the same as the JAC number display area 1004 during the variable display shown in FIG. That is, the JAC number display area 1004 while the jackpot game is being executed shows the total number of JAC numbers that have been played up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game, as in the case during the variable display. it's shown.

In this way, during the JAC game, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the jackpot game is being executed displays various information about the JAC game (specifically, the jackpot and The name of the winning type, the JAC pattern, the number of remaining rounds, and the total number of JACs) are displayed. As a result, the player can play the game while grasping the information about the JAC game while the jackpot game is being executed during the JAC game.

In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a background screen and a predetermined character are displayed in addition to the variable display of identification patterns and information about the JAC game. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 98, a character is displayed standing with a sword.

Next, a description will be given of an effect relating to the big win game when a big win is achieved during the JAC game.

Incidentally, the big-hit game is a game that is played after the design of the big-hit is determined and before the next variable display is started. The performance relating to the jackpot game is mainly divided into three periods, that is, an opening (OP) performance period, a jackpot round period, and an end interval period. In addition, during the OP effect period, a win start effect (for example, an opening (OP) effect) is performed. In addition, during the period of the jackpot round, an inter-round effect (for example, continuous round effect) is performed. Also, during the end interval period, a winning end effect (for example, an ending (ED) effect) is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the limit is not reached (that is, when the JAC game continues after the end of the big win game), the JAC game ends when the limit is reached (that is, after the end of the big win game). At the same time, the timing at which the ED effect period ends (the timing at which the ED effect ends) is made different between the case of a big hit (when the EX game is started) and the case of the jackpot. In addition, the timing at which the ED effect executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the normal jackpot or the jackpot of the probability variation pattern (specific area passage easy pattern) is also different.

First, below, using FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, an effect relating to a big win game in the case of a big win when the limit has not been reached will be described.

In addition, FIG.99(a) is the production|presentation flow of a big-hit game at the time of limit non-reaching. In FIG. 99(a), the passage of time from the left side to the right side of the paper surface and the content of the performance performed corresponding to the passage of time are shown. In addition, in FIG. 99(a), it is assumed that the JAC game, which is a probability variable/time-saving game, continues after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), for example, when the hit type is a JAC1 jackpot and the symbol (icon) 7 (blue) is confirmed, the opening (OP) effect is performed during the OP effect period. In the OP effect, for example, the player is notified that the big winning hole 540 will be opened, and an effect is performed to raise the expectation of the player regarding the acquisition of prize balls.

When the OP effect ends, the next big hit round period starts, and the continuous round effect is started. In the round continuation effect, for example, an effect is performed in which the player is notified that the round game will continue, for each round. Further, when the round continuation effect is being performed, the screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is as shown in FIG. 98, for example. That is, while the round continuation effect is being performed, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the name of the jackpot type, the JAC pattern, the number of remaining rounds, and the total number of JAC numbers.

When the round continuation effect ends, the ending interval period starts next, and the ending (ED) effect starts. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 99(a), in the production flow of the jackpot game when the limit is not reached, the timing of starting and ending the ED production is set to be the same as the timing of starting and ending the end interval period. there is Also, in the following description, the ED effect when the limit has not been reached is referred to as "first ED effect". Here, FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b) show an example of the effect contents displayed in the first ED effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(a), in the first ED effect, the characters "Jump end!!" are first displayed to inform the player that the jackpot game is over. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(b), the characters "More to come!" are displayed to inform the player that the JAC game will continue. The first ED effect ends simultaneously with the end of the end interval period, that is, the end of the jackpot game.

Thus, when the big win game ends, the first ED performance (that is, the performance related to the big win game) also ends in the same way, and next, the first variation (first variation display) of the pattern is performed in the probability variable/time saving state. Incidentally, in the first variation, at the same time as the symbol variation display is started, an effect relating to the variation display is displayed.

Thus, in the case of a jackpot when the limit has not been reached, the production related to the jackpot game (OP production, round continuation production, and first ED production) is the timing at which the production ends (more specifically, the first The timing at which the ED effect ends) is the same as the timing at which the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the end interval period (ED effect period) is set to a relatively short period (for example, 5 seconds). Thus, by setting the end interval period (ED performance period) to a short period, the next big win can be made as early as possible. That is, since many jackpot games can be played within the range of the limit in a short period of time, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to acquire many prize balls, thereby improving the interest of the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of special figure 2 jackpots (that can continue the JAC game) are provided, but all of these end interval periods are set to be the same. The ED performance period may be set to be the same for a specific winning group (for example, a variable probability big winning group, etc.) and different from other groups (for example, a normal big winning group, etc.), or may be set for each big winning type. may be different. Also, the same effect as during the JAC game is executed in the jackpot game, making it difficult for the player to determine that the jackpot game is in progress, and the jackpot game and the JAC game or the small win game are performed seamlessly. good. In that case, the limit display may not be performed, and it may be made difficult to recognize when the limiter is reached. In addition, the player may be allowed to select one of these JAC game performance modes for a beginner or an advanced player at the time of the first time variable probability big hit. Alternatively, the effect of the JAC game to be started thereafter may be determined according to the symbol type or lottery at the time of the first time probability variable jackpot. In the case of allowing the player to make a selection, a game machine meeting the needs of the player can be provided, and in the case of making the decision at the time of the first probability variable jackpot, a game machine that does not get bored can be provided.
As for the update timing of the limiter, the number of times of the limiter may be added at the start of the big win. In addition, the number of limit times is added at the end of the big hit, and if the game after that is a probability variable game, it is determined whether or not the limit has been reached, and if the limit has not been reached, it is regarded as a probability variable game, and if the limit has been reached. It may be possible to clear the limit number of times as a normal game. It can also be applied to a gaming machine that shifts to a variable probability state when occurs.Also, a limiter may be applied to the number of occurrences of a time-saving game). Also, the limit number of times may be added when the big win is started with the variable probability pattern, or the limit number of times may be added when the big win is started with the variable probability pattern and the big win is finished. In addition, counting of the number of limit times is not limited to these configurations as long as the number of limit times does not differ.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 99, 100 and 101, a description will be given of the effects relating to the big win game when the big win is reached when the limit is reached.

In addition, FIG.99(b) is the production|presentation flow of a big-hit game at the time of limit reach|attainment. In FIG. 99(b), similarly to FIG. 99(a), the passage of time from the left side to the right side of the paper surface and the content of the effect performed corresponding to the passage of time are shown. In addition, in FIG. 99(b), after the end interval period ends, that is, after the jackpot game ends, the JAC game (probability variable / time saving state game) ends due to reaching the limit, and a new EX game (non-probability change / time saving state game) shall be started.

In the present embodiment, for example, after the hit type is JAC4 and the pattern (icon) 7 (yellow) is confirmed, among the effects related to the jackpot game when the limit is reached, the OP effect and the round continuation effect , It is the same as the production related to the big hit game when the limit has not been reached. Therefore, among the effects related to the jackpot game when the limit is reached, the explanation of the OP effect and the round continuation effect is omitted. Further, in the following description, it is assumed that the jackpot of which the type of hit is JAC4 has an identification symbol "111" which is stopped and displayed.

After the end of the round continuation effect, the end interval period is started next, so that the ending (ED) effect period is reached, and the ending (ED) effect is started. Also, the ED effect when reaching the limit includes a result display effect and an EX game shift effect.

In the result display effect, in the JAC game, an effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot game has ended and that the limit has been reached. Here, FIGS. 100(c) and 100(d) show an example of the effect contents displayed in the result display effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(c), in the result display effect, as in the first ED effect when the limit has not been reached (see FIG. 100(a)), first of all, "Jump end!!" Characters are displayed to inform the player that the big win game is over. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(d), unlike the first ED effect when the limit has not been reached (see FIG. 100(b)), the characters "Result Announcement!!" and "Rank S" are displayed. , the player's game evaluation (score) in the JAC game is reported.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and (b), the result display effect is performed during a period corresponding to the first ED effect when the limit has not been reached (that is, the end interval period). Specifically, the timing at which the result display effect starts and ends is set to be the same as the timing at which the first ED effect when the limit is not reached is started and ended. In other words, the timing at which the result display effect ends is the same as the timing at which the jackpot game ends (the timing at which the end interval period ends).

In this way, when the result display effect is completed, the remaining EX game transition effect of the ED effect is performed next. That is, the ED effect (first ED effect) when the limit has not been reached shown in FIG. ) is continued without ending at the timing when the jackpot game ends (timing when the end interval period ends).

In this way, the EX game shift effect is performed after the big win game ends (after the end interval period ends). That is, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the EX game transition effect is started at the same time as the first variation (first variation display) after the jackpot game is over (after the end interval period is over). Thus, the EX game shift effect is performed in parallel with the first variation display. In the present embodiment, the EX game shift effect is set for a period of 10 seconds, for example.
When there is no suspension at the end of the big win, the game is stopped with the result display effect in the ED effect displayed, and when a new start prize is generated, the EX game transition effect is started.

Here, for the first variation after reaching the limit, the variation pattern LG is selected as the variation pattern as described above. That is, a longer period is set for the first variation after reaching the limit than when another variation pattern is selected (second and subsequent variations). In the present embodiment, the variation pattern LG is defined as 13 seconds, for example. Therefore, although the EX game transition effect is started at the same time as the first variation display, it ends during the first variation display (specifically, with three seconds remaining).

In the EX game transition effect, an effect is performed to inform the player that the JAC game is over and the EX game is to be started next. Here, FIGS. 101(a) to 101(c) show an example of the effect contents displayed in the EX game transition effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(a), in the EX game transition effect, first, a character full of vitality is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(b), the characters "EX game!!" are displayed, and the player is notified of the specific game to be played next. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(c), the identification symbol (“111” in FIG. 101(c)) relating to the big win that triggered the big win game is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this way, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the (actually finished) jackpot game had continued until now.

In this way, the period during which the EX game transition effect is performed is the period of the first variation after the end of the big win game, but it seems as if the big win game is still continuing, and the big win game is played during that continuation. It is possible to give the player an impression as if an effect (ED effect) related to the game is being performed.

In parallel with the execution of the EX game transition effect, the first variation display is performed, but the variation display is small and It is performed at a position off the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (that is, in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize). That is, the player who has the impression that the big win game is still continuing (that is, the variation display of the next first variation has not started) feels uncomfortable when actually viewing the variation display. I try not to After the end of the ED effect, the identification pattern in FIG. 101(c) starts to be displayed in a variable manner. good. Alternatively, the display of the identification pattern may be turned off once, and the small change display at the lower right may be enlarged and moved to the center to start the change.

Further, when the EX game transition effect is completed, the effect related to the variation display of the first variation is performed using the remaining period (for example, 3 seconds) of the first variation. That is, the variable display of the identification symbol of the first variation is stopped during the remaining period, and then the second variation is started.

Thus, as described above, in the JAC game, since it is required to accelerate the number of jackpot games to be played at high speed, the period during which the ED effect is performed is set to a short period (for example, 5 seconds). However, when the limit is reached, it is necessary to notify the player of specific information such as the player's performance in the JAC game by the result display effect, or the specific game to be played next by the EX game transition effect, for example. Therefore, it is conceivable that all the necessary information cannot be provided to the player in such a short period of time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the limit is reached, the ED effect is not terminated at the timing when the jackpot game is terminated (timing when the termination interval period is terminated), but is continued until the middle of the next first variation. As a result, for example, even if all the end interval periods set by the sub CPU 201 are set to be the same, the ED effect is performed in a short period when the limit is not reached, and the ED effect (result display) is performed when the limit is reached. effect and EX game transition effect) can be performed in a long period (for example, 15 seconds). That is, it is possible to facilitate the time management of production.

[Look-ahead effect]
In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball wins the first start hole or the second start hole, the starting memory (starting information) acquired at the time of winning, that is, various Data (random number for judging a big hit, random number for design determination, etc.) is reserved. In this way, after the variable display of the currently executed symbols is completed, the variable display of the reserved symbols is started. The number of times of variation of reserved symbols (number of reservations) is displayed on the normal symbol reservation display section 72, the first special design reservation display section 75, the second special design reservation display section 76, and the liquid crystal display device 16. be.

In addition, on the liquid crystal display device 16, the number of spherical icons corresponding to the number of suspensions is displayed as a display of the number of suspensions. Below, the said spherical icon is called a "holding ball." The reserved ball is associated with various data (information) acquired at the winning of the starting opening that triggered the selection of the pattern, with respect to the pattern corresponding to the reserved ball. In this way, in this embodiment, based on the information of the reserved ball, hit determination regarding the symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is performed, and a predetermined effect (prefetch effect) is performed based on the determination result. Among the look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect related to the appearance (display mode) of the icon based on the determination result may be referred to as a pending look-ahead effect.

Whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is determined by the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 94(a)) by the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) as described above. More specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines a part of the effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, which is data indicating the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101, the stop symbol, the extracted random number for determination of effect, and the like. , it is determined whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect (see step S1431). In addition, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect includes a first look-ahead effect, a second look-ahead effect, a holding continuous suggestion effect during a small winning game, and the like, which will be described later.

Below, before performing detailed description about the look-ahead effect, the outline of the display of the pending ball will be described.

In the following description, for the sake of convenience, a simplified drawing of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is used. For example, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays three decorative patterns (variable display), and also has a reserved ball display area 1100 and a reserved ball display area 1200 (see FIG. 105).

The reserved ball display area 1100 is an area for displaying, as an image of a reserved ball, holding information corresponding to the starting memory that is the basis of the variable display of identification symbols (during the first variable display in the case of a pseudo-run). , located at the bottom left of the screen. Also, when the identification pattern is finally confirmed and displayed and at least one reserved ball is displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200, from the reserved ball display area 1200 to the reserved ball display area 1100 One parked ball is shown moving.

The reserved ball display area 1200 is an area for displaying the reserved information corresponding to the 1st to 4th starting memories in parallel as the images of the reserved balls, and is located on the right side of the reserved ball display area 1100 . In the reserved ball display area 1200, the first reserved information stored most recently is displayed as the leftmost reserved ball, and the second to fourth reserved information are displayed by a plurality of reserved balls sequentially arranged to the right of the leftmost reserved ball. Is displayed. In the reserved ball display area 1200, basically, each time the leftmost reserved ball indicating the first reserved information is erased, it is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100, and the remaining second to fourth reserved information is displayed. If there is a held ball indicating , it is displayed so as to shift to the left.

In the following, of the reserved ball display area 1200, the area where the first reserved ball is displayed as the reserved ball is the "first reserved ball display area 1201", and the area where the second reserved ball is displayed as the reserved ball. "Second held ball display area 1202", "third held ball display area 1203" for the area where the third held information is displayed as the held ball, and "third held ball display area 1203" for the area where the fourth held information is displayed as the held ball 4 holding ball display area 1204", respectively.

[First look-ahead effect]
The first look-ahead effect will be described below.

In the first look-ahead effect, when the reserved ball targeted for the look-ahead effect is displayed so as to move to the reserved ball display area 1100, a predetermined image (in this embodiment, is an effect that displays whether or not the character) will appear. The first look-ahead effect is mainly divided into a first effect and a second effect.

The first effect is a effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened (displayed as if it were blacked out). When the first effect is performed and the screen is darkened, only the three identification symbols, the reserved ball display area 1100 and the reserved ball display area 1200 are displayed on the screen (see FIG. 105). After the reserved ball is displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200, the timing at which the first performance is performed is determined at the time of winning when the starting memory of the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead performance is acquired. Also, the timing at which the first effect is performed is determined using a predetermined table (darkening start pattern determination table). A plurality of dark change start pattern determination tables are provided, and one table is selected according to where in the reserved ball display area 1200 the reserved ball, which is the target of the first look-ahead effect, is first displayed.

Next, the dark change start pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 102(a) is a darkening start pattern determination table used when the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the fourth reserved ball display area 1204. FIG. In FIG. 102(a), one pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery from three patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, pattern 3) excluding pattern (PTN) 0 that does not perform the first look-ahead effect. It should be noted that the display of "suspended -3", "suspended -2", "suspended -1", and "relevant" are displayed after the suspended ball first displayed in the fourth suspended ball display area 1204 is moved and displayed. It means display area.

Specifically, when the held ball is first displayed in the fourth held ball display area 1204 and, for example, pattern 2 is selected, this held ball is "held -3" (the third held ball display When moved and displayed in the area 1203), it becomes "-". That is, even when the ball on hold is moved and displayed in the third ball on hold display area 1203, the first effect is not yet started (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is not darkened). Next, when this held ball is moved and displayed to "hold-2" (second held ball display area 1202), it becomes "start of darkening". That is, when the held ball is moved and displayed in the second held ball display area 1202, the first effect is started (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is turned dark).

Next, when this held ball is moved and displayed in "held -1" (first held ball display area 1201), it becomes "darkening continuation". That is, when the ball on hold is moved and displayed in the first ball on hold display area 1201, the first effect is continued (the screen remains blacked out). Next, when this reserved ball is moved and displayed to "relevant" (relevant ball display area 1100), it becomes "relevant lottery". That is, when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100, a predetermined lottery is performed, and an effect (second effect described later) is performed according to the lottery result.

FIG. 102(b) is a darkening start pattern determination table used when the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203. FIG. Similarly, FIG. 102(c) is a darkening start pattern determination table used when the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202. FIG. When the reserved ball is first displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 or the second reserved ball display area 1202, these tables are used to display the movement of the reserved ball at a predetermined timing. An effect is started (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened).

The second effect is an effect of displaying whether or not a predetermined character is to appear on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 that has been darkened by the first effect. In more detail, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, when the second effect is performed, first, an effect (EF) consisting of particles of light with high luminance is displayed on the screen that has been darkened. be. Then, a state (process) in which a predetermined character gradually appears as the particles gather is displayed. Then, either a performance (appearance performance) in which a predetermined character appears completely by an effect or a performance (fake performance) in which a predetermined character does not completely appear (is erased during appearance) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, when there is a holding group, the second effect may suggest that there is a holding group. have. Note that the holding series is when the holding ball that becomes a big hit is moved and displayed in the holding ball display area 1100 (that is, the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the holding ball moved and displayed in the holding ball display area 1100 starts. ), it means that one or a plurality of held balls displayed in the held ball display area 1200 includes a held ball that will be a big hit.

The specific content of the second effect is when the held ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is moved and displayed in the held ball display area 1100 (that is, when the held ball is moved and displayed in the held ball display area 1100) When the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the ball is started), it is determined by a predetermined lottery. In this way, the specific content of the second effect is not the timing at which it is decided to perform the first look-ahead effect (that is, the timing at which the starting memory of the holding ball that is the target of the first look-ahead effect is acquired). , Determined at the timing at which it is possible to confirm whether or not one or a plurality of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit reserved ball (that is, the timing at which it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a reserved group). be done.

Further, the specific contents of the second effect are determined using a predetermined table (character appearance propriety determination table). A plurality of character appearance determination tables are provided, and one table is selected according to a predetermined process. In the predetermined process, although the details will be described later, one table is selected depending on whether the suggestion of the holding series is not made or the suggestion of the holding series may be made.

Hereinafter, of the plurality of (two in this embodiment, two) character appearance decision tables, the table selected when the holding group is not suggested will be referred to as a "holding group non-report character selection table". Further, a table selected when it is permissible to suggest a holding series is referred to as a "holding series notification character selection table". In this embodiment, it is assumed that character A, character B, character C, and character D are provided as the predetermined characters.

Next, the character appearance determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 103(a) shows a holding group non-report character selection table. As shown in FIG. 103(a), when the holding continuation non-notification character selection table is used, one pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery from 8 patterns (patterns 1 to 8). If the held ball moved and displayed in the held ball display area 1100 is not a win (if it is a loss), one pattern is selected from patterns 1 to 5. FIG. Further, when the held ball moved and displayed in the held ball display area 1100 is a win, one pattern is selected from patterns 6 to 8. FIG.

"Content 1" shown in FIG. 103(a) indicates that the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened by the first effect. "Content 2" indicates which character's effect is to be displayed on the darkened screen. Also, the "out" indicates whether or not the character will appear completely due to the effect (that is, whether it is an appearance effect or a false effect). As shown in FIG. 103(a), except for pattern 1, when the result is a loss, the false effect is always selected. On the other hand, when the result is a hit, the appearance effect is always selected.

FIG. 103(b) shows a holding continuous notification character selection table. As shown in FIG. 103(b), when the reservation continuous notification character selection table is used, one pattern is selected from nine patterns (patterns 1 to 9) by a predetermined lottery. If the held ball moved and displayed in the held ball display area 1100 is not a win (if it is a loss), one pattern is selected from patterns 1 to 5. FIG. Further, when the held ball moved and displayed in the held ball display area 1100 is a win, one pattern is selected from patterns 6 to 9. FIG.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 103(b), when the holding continuous notification character selection table is used, pattern 1 is selected as in the case of using the holding continuous non-report character selection table shown in FIG. 103(a). Except for this, if the result is a loss, the fake effect is always selected. On the other hand, when the result is a hit, the appearance effect is always selected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103(b), unlike the holding consecutive non-reporting character selection table, the holding consecutive non-notifying character selection table defines pattern 9 as a pattern that can be selected in the case of winning. In this way, in the case where it is permissible to suggest a holding group, when pattern 9 is selected, the effect of character D is displayed, and the character D appears completely by the appearance effect. On the other hand, when the holding group non-reporting character selection table is used, that is, when the holding group is not suggested, the character D does not completely appear due to the appearance effect. In this way, in the first look-ahead effect, when the character D appears completely, it is suggested that there is a holding group.
The contents of the first effect and the second effect may be determined for both the first effect and the second effect when the suspension targeted for the first prefetch effect occurs. It is also possible to determine the contents of the first performance when such suspension occurs, and to determine the contents of the second performance when the variable display of the suspension to be the target of the first look-ahead performance is performed. Further, after determining the effect contents of the first effect and the second effect, when the probability variable jackpot is obtained and the limiter is not reached, the effect content of the second effect may be changed, or the first effect and the second effect may be changed. After determining the contents of the second performance, if there is a probability variable big hit in the suspension when the variable display of the suspension targeted for the first look-ahead performance is performed, the contents of the second performance are changed once, but then the limit is reached. If it is determined that the second effect is being performed, the second effect may be executed based on the effect contents before the change.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the selection processing of the on-hold continuation notification character selection table and the on-hold continuation non-report character selection table will be described.

Table selection processing relating to the character appearance permission/inhibition determination table is executed in effect pattern determination processing by the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201).

In step S1451, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the first effect of the first look-ahead effect is being executed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the first effect of the first look-ahead effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S1452. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the first effect of the first look-ahead effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1453. 102(a) to 102(c), a pattern other than pattern 0 (for example, pattern 1, etc.) in which the first look-ahead effect is not performed. is selected, and it does not matter whether or not the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 has actually turned dark.

In step S1452, the sub CPU 201 executes first effect determination processing. In the first effect determination process, it is determined whether or not to execute the first effect using the dark change start pattern determination table as described above. is started (timing at which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened). When the sub CPU 201 executes the first effect determination process, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect pattern determination process.

In step S1453, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hold related to the execution of the first effect is the current change. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is being displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 . When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hold related to the execution of the first effect is the current variation, the process proceeds to step S1454. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the hold related to the execution of the first effect is not the current variation, it ends the effect pattern determination process.

In step S1454, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the held ball displayed in the held ball display area 1200 has a big hit whose type is a hit action. In addition, the jackpot whose hit type is a hit operation is a jackpot of 4R (normal) of the special figure 2 corresponding to the corresponding symbol. That is, a jackpot whose hit type is a hit operation is a jackpot that shifts from a JAC game (probability variable/time saving state) to an EX game (non-probability change/time saving state) after a big win game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the held ball displayed in the held ball display area 1200 has a big hit whose hit type is a hit action, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1455. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no big hit of the type of hitting action in the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200, the process proceeds to step S1456.

In step S1456, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a jackpot of a specific type (hit type is JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3). It should be noted that a jackpot with a hit type of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 is a jackpot with a corresponding symbol of 4R (variable probability), 6R (variable probability) or 8R (variable probability) of special figure 2. That is, a jackpot with a hit type of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 is a jackpot in which the JAC game (probability variable/time saving state) continues after the jackpot game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 does not have a specific type of jackpot, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1455. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a specific type of jackpot, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1457.

In step S1457, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the limit has been reached (whether or not the number of times of continuation is the 10th big hit) based on the hit determination result of the symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that is the target of the first look-ahead effect. judge. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to shift from the JAC game (probability variation/time saving state) to the EX game (non-probability variation/time saving state) after the jackpot game by the reserved ball jackpot that is the target of the first look-ahead effect is completed. judge. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S1458. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S1455.

In step S1458, the sub CPU 201 determines the specific content of the second effect (more specifically, the specific content of the second effect in the case where it is permissible to suggest a holding group) in the first look-ahead effect. A holding continuous notification character selection table is selected as a character appearance propriety determination table for determining . After the process of step S1458, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1459.

In addition, (if the sub CPU201 in step S1454 determines that there is a 4R (normal) of the special figure 2 in the hold, or, in step S1456, the sub CPU201 is in the hold of the special figure 2 4R (probability variation), etc. If it is determined that there is no big hit, or if it is determined that the sub CPU 201 has reached the limit in step S1457, in step S1455, the sub CPU 201 determines the specifics of the second effect in the first look-ahead effect. A holding group non-notifying character selection table is selected as a character appearance decision table for determining the contents (more specifically, the specific contents of the second performance when the holding group is not suggested). After the process of step S1455, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1459.

In step S1459, the sub CPU 201 executes second effect determination processing. In the second effect determination process, as described above, the holding-continuation-not-reporting character selection table selected in step S1458 or the holding-continuation non-reporting character selection table selected in step S1455 is used to determine the specific second effect. Determine content. When the sub CPU 201 executes the second effect determination process, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect pattern determination process.

Thus, in the effect pattern determination process, when there is a big hit, which is a hitting action, on the held ball in the held ball display area 1200 (YES in step S1454), or after the big hit game on the held ball in the held ball display area 1200, JAC If there is no jackpot of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 where the game (probability variable/time saving state) continues (NO in step S1456), or if the limit is reached (YES in step S1457), suggest a pending series. is not desirable (or unnecessary), the non-reporting character selection table for holding series is selected to determine the specific content of the second effect in the first look-ahead effect.

On the other hand, if there is no big hit, which is a hitting operation, on the held ball in the held ball display area 1200 (NO in step S1454), and after the big hit game on the held ball in the held ball display area 1200, JAC game (variable probability / time saving state ) continues (YES in step S1456), and when the limit has not been reached (NO in step S1457), there is no problem in suggesting a pending series. , selects the reservation continuous notification character selection table, and determines the specific contents of the second performance in the first look-ahead performance.

Next, an example of specific contents of the first look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG.

First, as a premise, it is assumed that the current situation is that the JAC game is being played and the symbols are being variably displayed, as shown in FIG. 105(a). Also assume that the next big win does not reach the limit. Also, it is assumed that two held balls are displayed in the held ball display area 1200 (the first held ball display area 1201 and the second held ball display area 1202). It is also assumed that these two held balls are both lost.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 105(a), when the starting hole is won, the reserved ball is displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 as shown in FIG. 105(b). Here, it is assumed that the held ball displayed in the third held ball display area 1203 is a big hit.

For the sake of convenience, in the state shown in FIG. 105(b), the reserved ball displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 (that is, the big-hit reserved ball) will be referred to as "one-hit reserved ball". Further, the retained ball displayed in the first retained ball display area 1201 is referred to as "retained ball 1". Also, the held ball displayed in the second held ball display area 1202 is referred to as "held ball 2". Also, in the drawings, marks (“1”, “2”, “hit 1”) are attached to the reserved balls to facilitate identification of the reserved balls.

Further, in the following description, when one hit ball is displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203, it is assumed that the first look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern.

In such a case, since the reserved ball corresponding to the first look-ahead effect was first displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203, the dark change start pattern determination table shown in FIG. Specific contents of the first effect are determined. Here, it is assumed that pattern 1 is selected from a plurality of patterns defined in the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG. 102(b) by a predetermined lottery.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 105(b), the state shown in FIG. 105(c) is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105(c), the variable display of identification symbols is stopped at the lost symbols.

After the state shown in FIG. 105(c), the state shown in FIG. 105(d) is reached. Specifically, the held ball 1 displayed in the first held ball display area 1201 is moved and displayed in the held ball display area 1100 . Further, along with this, the identification pattern corresponding to the held ball 1 is variably displayed. Also, the held ball 2 displayed in the second held ball display area 1202 is moved and displayed in the first held ball display area 1201 . Also, the one-hit reserved ball displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 is moved and displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 .

Here, since the one-hit held ball displayed in the third held ball display area 1203 is moved and displayed in the second held ball display area 1202, it is specified in the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG. 102(b). According to pattern 1, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened. As a result, only the three identification symbols, the reserved ball display area 1100 and the reserved ball display area 1200 are visible on the screen.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 105(d), the state shown in FIG. 105(e) is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105(e), the variable display of the identification symbol corresponding to the held ball 1 is stopped at the losing symbol.

After the state shown in FIG. 105(e), the state shown in FIG. 105(f) is reached. Specifically, the held ball 2 displayed in the first held ball display area 1201 is moved and displayed in the held ball display area 1100 . In addition, along with this, the identification pattern corresponding to the held ball 2 is variably displayed. Also, the one-hit reserved ball displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 is moved and displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201 . Further, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 continues to darken according to pattern 1 defined in the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG. 102(b).

Also, in this state, for example, when two game balls enter the starting hole, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and similarly, a new held ball (referred to as “hit 2 held ball”) is displayed in the third held ball display area 1203 . Here, it is assumed that the new held ball displayed in the third held ball display area 1203 is a big hit. Thus, in the state shown in FIG. 105(f), the one-hit held ball displayed in the held-ball display area 1100 is a big hit, and one or more held balls displayed in the held-ball display area 1200 (In this case, the condition is that the limit number of times has not been reached when a big hit occurs with two hits on hold).

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 105(f), the state shown in FIG. 105(g) is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105(g), the variable display of the identification symbol corresponding to the held ball 2 is stopped at the losing symbol.

After the state shown in FIG. 105(g), the state shown in FIG. 105(h) is reached. Specifically, the hit 2 reserved balls displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 are moved and displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 . Also, the held ball 3 displayed in the second held ball display area 1202 is moved and displayed in the first held ball display area 1201 .

Also, the one-hit reserved ball displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201 is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 . In addition, along with this, the identification pattern corresponding to one hit and held ball is variably displayed. In addition, the three identification patterns are moved to the upper left part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16, and are variably displayed in a reduced size. Thus, a space for a predetermined effect (specifically, the second effect) is secured in the center of the screen.

Also, in the state shown in FIG. 105(h), that is, when the hit 1 held ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is moved and displayed in the held ball display area 1100, the character appearance determination table shown in FIG. 103 is displayed. is used to determine the specific content of the second effect of the first look-ahead effect. Here, it is assumed that pattern 9 defined in the holding continuous notification character selection table shown in FIG. 103(b) is selected.

In this way, in the state shown in FIG. 105(h), when the pattern 9 defined in the holding continuous notification character selection table is selected, the first effect ends and the second effect starts while the screen is darkened. , and as shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), an effect (EF) consisting of particles of light with high brightness is displayed on the darkened screen. Then, a state (process) in which the character D gradually appears as the particles gather is displayed. Then, when the state shown in FIG. 106(c) is reached, the character D appears completely due to the effect, and the blackening of the screen is resolved. Thus, the appearance effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed.

Note that in the present embodiment, the case where the character D appears by the appearance effect is limited to the case where there is a reserve group. That is, by the character D appearing by the appearance effect, it is possible to suggest the holding group to the player.

Especially in this embodiment, when the first effect ends, a darkened screen is displayed, and when the second effect starts, an effect (EF) is displayed on the darkened screen. It is a thing. Thus, the effect mode when the first effect ends and the effect mode when the second effect starts are substantially the same effect mode. In this way, the first look-ahead effect consists of the first effect of darkening the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the second effect of making a predetermined character appear by using an effect on the screen that has been darkened by the first effect. By combining them, it is possible to suggest a holding series without causing a sense of incongruity in connecting the first production and the second production. In this way, by performing an effect (that is, a mutually related effect of performing a first effect that makes the effect content of the second effect stand out) by a combination of black and high-luminance light particles. It can improve the interest of the person.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 106(c), the variable display of the identification symbols corresponding to the one-hit pending ball is stopped at the big-hit symbol.

In this way, an example of the specific contents of the first look-ahead effect when the appearance effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed has been described with reference to FIGS. Next, an example of the specific contents of the first look-ahead effect when the false effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed will be described.

Here, it is assumed that the newly displayed ball on hold in the third ball on hold display area 1203 shown in FIG. In addition, when the state shown in FIG. 105(h), that is, when the losing held ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is moved and displayed in the held ball display area 1100, the holding replay shown in FIG. 103(a) Assume that pattern 5 defined in the notification character selection table is selected.

In this case, until the state shown in FIG. 106(b), the same image as when the appearance effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed is displayed. That is, an effect (EF) made up of particles of light with high brightness is displayed on the screen that has been darkened. Then, a state (process) in which the character D gradually appears as the particles gather is displayed. However, after the state shown in FIG. 106(b), as shown in FIG. 106(d), light particles (effects) scatter, and character D does not appear completely (is erased in the middle of appearing). (fake effect) is displayed.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 106(d), the variable display of the identification symbol corresponding to the lost ball is stopped at the lost symbol.

[Second look-ahead effect]
The second look-ahead effect will be described below.

The second look-ahead effect is a effect that is performed when there is a 8R (probability variation) big hit holding group of special figure 2. Specifically, in the second look-ahead effect, the held ball displayed in the held ball display area 1100 has two 8R (probability variable) big hits of special figure 2, and any of the big hit held balls is limited. If it does not reach, JAC3 is displayed at the time of the first 8R (probability variation) big hit, giving the player an impression as if 16R probability variation is occurring.

In the second look-ahead effect, the effect is performed as if the end of the 8R (variable probability) jackpot in the first set and the start of the 8R (variable probability) jackpot in the second set continue. In this way, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the impression that the 8R (variable probability) jackpot in the first set and the 8R (variable probability) jackpot in the second set are continuous (series) (that is, 16R (variable probability) ) can be given to the player.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, two special figures 2 8R (probability variation) big hit (hit type is JAC3) (below, it may be referred to as "a state where the second look-ahead effect can be performed") ), and when the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, even if another lost ball is displayed between the two 8R (probability variable) reserved balls, Perform the second look-ahead effect. However, even when the second look-ahead effect can be performed and the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, a small hit is held between two 8R (probability variable) hold balls. When the sphere is displayed, the second look-ahead effect is not performed.

First, before explaining the production flow of the second look-ahead production, when the second look-ahead production is not performed, the special figure 2 8R (probable variation) jackpot (hit type is JAC1) production of the jackpot production Explain the flow.

In addition, FIG. 107 is the effect flow of the 8R (probability variable) jackpot (hit type is JAC1) of the special figure 2 when the second look-ahead effect is not performed. In addition, below, the said big-hit performance may be called "the normal 8R (variable probability) big-hit performance."

As shown in FIG. 107, when the 8R (probability variation) pattern of the special figure 2 is determined, the 8R (probability variation) jackpot game is started. When the jackpot game is started, the opening (OP) presentation is first performed during the OP presentation period. In the OP effect, such an effect as notifying the player that the jackpot game is about to start is performed. Specifically, for example, the player is notified that the big winning hole 540 will be opened, and an effect is performed that heightens the player's expectations regarding the acquisition of prize balls.

When the OP effect ends, the next big hit round period starts, and the continuous round effect is started. In the round continuation effect, for example, an effect is performed in which the player is notified that the round game will continue, for each round. Also, the current round number (1R, 2R, . . . , 8R) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 .

When the round continuation effect ends, it becomes an ending (ED) effect period, and the ending (ED) effect is started. In the first ED effect, the player is notified that the jackpot game is over, and that the JAC game is continued. In addition, ED production|presentation is complete|finished simultaneously with the completion|finish of a big-hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the effect flow of the big hit effect when the second look-ahead effect is performed will be described.

In addition, FIG. 108 is an effect flow of the big hit effect when the second look-ahead effect is performed. In FIG. 108, the effect flow of the first set (first big win game) and the effect flow of the second set (second big win game) are shown separately in upper and lower stages. In the following description, in the jackpot effect when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the description of the same effect as the normal 8R (variable probability) jackpot effect will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 108, when the 8R (probability variation) pattern of the special figure 2 is determined, the 8R (probability variation) jackpot game is started. In this embodiment, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the hit type is JAC3, and "V" is displayed as the symbol (icon) of the big hit (see FIG. 96, etc.). When the 1st set of the jackpot game is started, the OP performance period starts, and the 1st set of OP performance is performed. In the OP effect of the first set, such an effect as notifying the player that the jackpot game is about to start is performed.

When the first set of OP effects ends, the next big hit round period starts, and the first set of continuous round effects is started. Also, the current round number (1R, 2R, . . . , 8R) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 .

When the first set of round continuation effects ends, the ending (ED) effect period starts next, and the first set of ED effects is started. In the ED effect of the first set, unlike the normal 8R (variable probability) big win effect, the player is not notified of the end of the big win game or the continuation of the JAC game. In addition, the ED effect of the first set ends at the same time as the end of the big win game, like the normal 8R (variable probability) big win effect. In the above-described embodiment, the ED effect is performed after the end of the first set, but the ED effect may not be performed. In that case, the player can feel as if the first set and the second set are one big win.

When the first set of jackpot games is completed, a holding continuous effect (for convenience, referred to as a "series of holding continuous effects") is carried out as an effect during fluctuation. Here, a series of holding series effects are performed for the second 8R (probability) holding ball, and the second 8R (probability) holding ball, which is displayed before the second 8R (probability) holding ball. It is a production that will be done. In the series of holding consecutive effects, the symbols corresponding to the lost holding balls are displayed in a small size to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the fluctuation display and fluctuation stop of the relevant symbols.

In addition, in a series of holding consecutive effects, the pattern of 8R (probability variation) of the special figure 2 of the second set is confirmed. Here, similarly to the first set, "V" is displayed as the symbol (icon) for the big win in the second set.

In this way, when the second set of big winning games is started, the OP effect period starts, and the OP effect of the second set is performed. In addition, in the OP effect of the second set, unlike the OP effect of the first set, no effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot game is about to start.

When the second set of OP effects is completed, the next big hit round period starts, and the second set of continuous round effects is started. Further, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the number of rounds (9R, 10R, . . . , 16R) obtained by adding 8 to the actual number of rounds as the current number of rounds.

When the second set of round continuation effects ends, the ending (ED) effect period starts next, and the second set of ED effects is started. In the ED effect of the second set, unlike the ED effect of the first set, the player is notified that the jackpot game is over and the JAC game is continued. The ED performance of the second set ends simultaneously with the end of the big win game of the second set.

Thus, in the second look-ahead effect, it seems as if the end of the first set of 8R (probable variation) jackpot end and the second set of 8R (probability variation) jackpot start continue due to a series of holding consecutive effects etc. A performance is held. In this way, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the impression that the 8R (variable probability) jackpot in the first set and the 8R (variable probability) jackpot in the second set are continuous (series) (that is, 16R (variable probability) ) can be given to the player.

Here, as described above, when the second look-ahead effect can be performed and the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, another Even when a losing ball is displayed, a second look-ahead effect is performed. However, even in the case where the second look-ahead effect can be performed and the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, a small winning ball is held between two 8R (variable probability) ball. is displayed, the second look-ahead effect is not performed.

Therefore, below, using the flowchart of FIG. 109, when it becomes possible to perform the second look-ahead effect, processing for determining whether or not to actually perform the second look-ahead effect (second look-ahead effect execution decision processing) will be described.

The second look-ahead effect execution determination process shown in FIG. 109 is performed within the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 94(a)) by the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) as described above.

In step S1461, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern. The selection of the second look-ahead effect is determined based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, which is data indicating the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101, the stop pattern, the extracted random number value for determination of effect, and the like. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, the process proceeds to step S1462. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the second look-ahead effect is not selected as the effect pattern, it ends the second look-ahead effect execution determination process.

In step S1462, the sub CPU 201 selects, among the plurality of held balls displayed in the held ball display area 1200, to the left (earlier) than the held ball of the 8R jackpot (hit type is JAC3) of special figure 2. It is determined whether or not there is a held ball (hit type is S-JAC). When the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no small hit reserved ball on the left side (before) of the 8R big hit reserved ball of special figure 2, the process proceeds to step S1463. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a small hit reserved ball to the left (before) of the 8R big hit reserved ball of special figure 2, the process proceeds to step S1464.

In step S1463, the sub CPU 201 determines to actually perform the selected second look-ahead effect. After that, the sub CPU 201 ends the second look-ahead effect execution determination process.

Also, in step S1464, the sub CPU 201 determines not to actually perform the selected second look-ahead effect. In this case, the sub CPU 201 performs a jackpot effect (hit type is JAC1) of 8R (probability variation) of the special figure 2 instead of the second look-ahead effect (see FIG. 107). After that, the sub CPU 201 ends the second look-ahead effect execution determination process.

With such a process, even when the second look-ahead effect can be performed and the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, between the two 8R (variable probability) reserved balls It is possible to cancel the execution of the second look-ahead effect when the reserved ball of the small hit is displayed.

Here, for example, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, it is assumed that a small winning ball is displayed between two 8R (variable probability) reserved balls. In such a case, by performing a small winning game, an effect is performed as if the end of the 8R (variable probability) jackpot in the first set and the start of the 8R (variable probability) jackpot in the second set continue. can't That is, when a small winning game is performed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the 8R (variable probability) jackpot in the first set and the 8R (variable probability) jackpot in the second set are continuous (series). The inconvenience of not being able to

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the second look-ahead effect can be performed and the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, between the two 8R (variable probability) holding balls By canceling the execution of the second look-ahead effect when the reserved ball of the small hit is displayed in the second play, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring when the second look-ahead effect is performed. .
In the above example, two big hits including the holding group are shown, but there are cases where a maximum of four holdings can be an 8R variable big hit, in which case it is possible to display up to 40R. is.
In the above example, the ED effect is performed at the end of the 8R jackpot in the first set, but the ED effect is not performed, and the effect is continued immediately before the end of the 8th round. You may make it continue. However, in that case, it is possible to display "Preparing to start R" between 8R and 9R in the production, because there is time for change in the middle and OP time for the 8R big hit in the second set. desirable. In addition, it is desirable that the lottery value is set so that a short losing variation pattern in the JAC game is likely to be selected. However, if a long-time fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation pattern of the loss, there is a possibility that the preparation will be long, so the fluctuation time of the loss between the 1st and 2nd sets is also predicted and long In some cases, the second look-ahead effect may not be executed. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), the second look-ahead is allowed, and JAC3 is displayed. time, etc.), execution of the second production is prohibited.
In the above example, when there is a small win between the 8R big win of the first set and the 8R big win of the second set, the second look-ahead effect is not performed, but it may be performed. In that case, 1R to 8R are performed in the 8R big win of the first set, and then in the small wins performed before the 8R big win of the second set, the 9th round of performance is performed, and then the 8R big win of the second set is performed. , 10R to 17R on the production may be executed. Furthermore, if there are two small wins on the way, then 11R to 18R for performance may be executed in the second set of 8R big wins.
In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of a specific game, the probability variation/time saving state is given as an example of not a specific game. For example, as an example which is a specific game, it may be a non-probability variation/time saving state or non-probability variation/time saving state, as an example not a specific game. Further, as an example of a specific game, it may be a non-probability variation/time-saving state and a non-probability variation/time-saving state as a state that is not a specific game.

[Holding group suggestion production during small hit]
Below, the holding consecutive suggestion effect performed during the small winning game will be described.

The holding consecutive suggestion effect performed during the small winning game suggests that the held ball displayed in the held ball display area 1200 has a specific type of big win when the small winning game is performed in the JAC game. It is a performance to do. In this embodiment, the specific type of jackpot means a jackpot of which type is JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3. In other words, the specific type of jackpot means a jackpot that does not shift to the EX game (non-probability change/time saving state) (probability change/time saving state is continued) when the jackpot game ends in the JAC game. The holding consecutive suggestion effect is performed using a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. - 特許庁

Below, the screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the small winning game is being executed in the JAC game will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 110, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a plurality of display areas for displaying various effects (information). Specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a JAC pattern display area 1010 , a JAC number display area 1004 and a prize ball number display area 1013 .

Note that the JAC symbol display area 1010 and the JAC number display area 1004 are the same as the screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the jackpot game shown in FIG. omitted. In the JAC symbol display area 1010, an icon "S-JAC" is displayed to notify that the winning type of the winning game is a small winning.

The prize ball number display area 1013 is a display area for displaying the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit game. For example, when one game ball wins in the big winning hole 540 in a small winning game, the winning ball number display area 1013 displays "+10" which means the number of the winning ball. "+10" displayed in the number-of-balls display area 1013 is erased after a predetermined period of time. Incidentally, when a plurality of game balls have won, the same number of "+10" as the number of won game balls is displayed.

Also, the number-of-balls display area 1013 is composed of a plurality of display areas. In this embodiment, the prize number display area 1013 includes a first prize number display area 1013a, a second prize number display area 1013b, a third prize number display area 1013c, and a fourth prize number display area 1013d. , consists of four display areas.

The first number-of-balls display area 1013 a is provided in the left center portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and below the JAC symbol display area 1010 . Also, the second number-of-balls display area 1013 b is provided in the right center portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and below the number-of-JAC display area 1004 . Also, the third prize number display area 1013c is provided in the lower right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 . The fourth number-of-balls display area 1013 d is provided between the JAC symbol display area 1010 and the number-of-JACs display area 1004 in the upper center portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

Also, in the first prize number display area 1013a, the second prize number display area 1013b, the third prize number display area 1013c, and the fourth prize number display area 1013d, the game ball has entered the big prize opening 540. "+10" is displayed in order. Specifically, when the game ball first wins after the start of the small winning game, "+10" is displayed in the first prize ball number display area 1013a. Further, when the game ball wins next time, "+10" is displayed in the second prize ball number display area 1013b. Further, when the game ball wins next time, "+10" is displayed in the third prize ball number display area 1013c. Further, when the game ball wins next time, "+10" is displayed in the fourth prize ball number display area 1013d. Also, when the game ball wins next time, the order is returned to the first prize ball number display area 1013a.

Note that FIG. 110 shows an example of display when two game balls win in the opened big winning hole 540 after the start of the small winning game. That is, in the example of the display shown in FIG. 110, after the start of the small winning game, "+10" is displayed in the first winning ball number display area 1013a corresponding to the first winning game ball, and then the winning game. "+10" is displayed in the second prize ball number display area 1013b corresponding to the game ball that has been played.

In the following, the specific effect content of the holding consecutive suggestion effect performed using the number-of-balls display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described. Note that, the holding series suggesting effect described below means that when a small win occurs during the JAC game and a probability variable big win is described in the holding, the JAC game continues after the big win is finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, the holding consecutive suggesting effect is a effect of changing the color of "+10" displayed in the prize number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. Specifically, when the holding streak suggesting effect is performed, the color of “+10” displayed in the number-of-balls display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16 is changed to the normal (when the holding streak suggesting effect is not performed) white. It is golden in color, unlike In this way, when the holding series suggestion effect is performed, the player can recognize that there is a holding series by visually recognizing the gold "+10" displayed in the number-of-balls display area 1013 .

In this way, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole 540 during a small winning game, the number of winning balls is displayed in accordance with the winning, and the color of the characters displayed is made different from the normal color to indicate the number of reserved reams. existence can be suggested.

Here, as described above, the reason why the holding group suggestion effect is performed when there is a holding group is that when the jackpot game ends in the JAC game, it does not shift to the EX game (non-probability change / time saving state) (probability change / This is the case when there is a big hit held ball (the time saving state continues). In other words, in the present embodiment, even if a holding series can be performed by executing a predetermined process, the holding series suggestion effect is not performed unless a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the processing of whether or not to perform the holding consecutive suggestion effect is the processing of determining whether or not to display the number of prize balls in the small winning game in the number of prize balls display area 1013 (hereinafter referred to as “small (referred to as a winning game prize ball count display process).

Below, using the flowchart of FIG. 112, the processing for displaying the number of small winning game prize balls will be described.

The small hit game prize number display processing shown in FIG. 112 is performed in the effect pattern determination processing by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) as described above.

In step S1471, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a small winning game is being played. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the small winning game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1472. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the small-hit game is not being played, the sub-CPU 201 ends the small-hit game prize number display processing.

In step S<b>1472 , the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the big prize opening 540 . When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball has won a prize in the big winning hole 540, the process proceeds to step S1473. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that no game balls have won in the big winning hole 540, the sub CPU 201 ends the small winning game prize number display processing.

In this way, if it is not during the small winning game (NO in step S1471) or if there is no winning of the game ball in the big winning opening 540 (NO in step S1472), the acquisition of the prize ball in the small winning game is Therefore, no prize balls (“+10”) are displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

Next, in step S1473, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the held ball displayed in the held ball display area 1200 has a jackpot of a specific type (hit type is JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3). It should be noted that a jackpot with a hit type of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 is a jackpot with a corresponding symbol of 4R (variable probability), 6R (variable probability) or 8R (variable probability) of special figure 2. That is, a jackpot with a hit type of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 is a jackpot in which the JAC game (probability variable/time saving state) continues after the jackpot game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 does not have a specific type of jackpot, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1476. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a specific type of jackpot, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1474.

In step S1474, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the held ball displayed in the held ball display area 1200 has a big hit whose type is a hit action. In addition, the jackpot whose hit type is a hit operation is a jackpot of 4R (normal) of the special figure 2 corresponding to the corresponding symbol. That is, a jackpot whose hit type is a hit operation is a jackpot that shifts from a JAC game (probability variable/time saving state) to an EX game (non-probability change/time saving state) after a big win game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the held ball displayed in the held ball display area 1200 has a big hit whose hit type is a hit action, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1476. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the pending ball displayed in the pending ball display area 1200 does not have a big hit with a hitting motion, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1475.

In step S1475, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pending jackpot has reached the limit. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S1476. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S1477.

In step S1476, the sub CPU 201 causes the number of prize balls to be displayed in the number of prize balls display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16, and changes the color of the displayed character ("+10") to white. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the holding consecutive suggestion effect in the small winning game prize number display processing of this time.

In this way, when the processing of step S1476 is performed, it is the case that a game ball has won in the big winning opening 540 (YES in step S1472) while the small winning game is being played (YES in step S1471). However, the case where there is no jackpot in which the JAC game (probability variable/time saving state) continues after the jackpot game is played on the reserved ball (NO in step S1473) is included. In such a case, since there is no holding ream in the first place, no reserving ream is performed.

In addition, when the processing of step S1476 is performed, when the small winning game is in progress (YES in step S1471) and when there is a winning of the game ball in the big winning hole 540 (YES in step S1472), This includes the case where there is a big hit with a type of hitting action on the held ball (YES in step S1474). In such a case, when the next big hit is made, the player will fall out of the JAC game (probability variable / time saving state) (that is, a relatively disadvantageous big hit will be made to the player, and the player will (Because it will spoil the interest), do not hold a reservation.

Next, in step S1477, the sub CPU 201 causes the number of prize balls to be displayed in the number of prize balls display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16, and changes the color of the displayed characters ("+10") to gold. That is, in the small-hit game prize ball number display processing of this time, the sub CPU 201 performs a holding consecutive suggestion effect.

In this way, when the processing of step S1477 is performed, it is the case that the small winning game is in progress (YES in step S1471) and the game ball has won in the big winning hole 540 (YES in step S1472). In addition, when there is a jackpot in which the JAC game (probability variable/time saving state) continues after the jackpot game is played on the reserved ball (YES in step S1473), and when there is no jackpot of the type of hit on the reserved ball (step S1474) In NO), and when the current state has not reached the limit and is in the JAC game (probability variation/time saving state) (NO in step S1475) is included. In such a case, even if there is a holding series and the holding series suggesting effect is performed, the player's interest is not spoiled, so the holding series is performed. In this way, the interest of the player can be improved when the holding consecutive suggestion effect is performed.
It should be noted that if step S1475 is affirmative, gold is always used, but a lottery may be added there. Also, the color may be changed when there is a small win in the reserve during the small win. In that case, instead of gold, red may be used as the color to indicate the small winning streak. In addition, when a lottery is added as described above, it may be decided from white, red, or gold when there is a big hit in the reserve, and in the case of 4R probability variation, white is more likely to be decided. , In the case of 6R probability variation, red is often determined. In the case of 8R probability variation, a lot of money may be easily determined.

[Game evaluation process]
The game evaluation process in the JAC game will be described below.

First, with reference to FIG. 113, the game evaluation process in the JAC game will be explained. In the game evaluation process, the game played by the player during the JAC game is evaluated based on a predetermined standard described later. The game evaluation process is performed in the effect control process of step S1104 shown in FIG. The game evaluation process is performed when the limit is reached and when the limit is not reached, when the player falls.

In step S1501, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining the rank points of the game count. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the rank points of the game count based on the rank point determination table of the game count shown in FIG. It should be noted that the game count (during the JAC game) means the total number of variable displays performed from the start of the current JAC game to the end of the variable probability. Also, the rank points of the game count refer to points indicating the evaluation made according to the numerical value of the game count.

FIG. 114 shows a table defining ranks and rank points for game counts. The table shown in FIG. 114 defines ranks and rank points according to the game count during the JAC game. Ranks are classified into four levels (S, A, B, and C), with S, A, B, and C in descending order of evaluation. Similarly, rank points are classified into 4 levels (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), and the higher the number (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), the higher the evaluation. It is a thing. Ranks and rank points correspond to each other, and rank S gives 4 rank points, rank A gives 3 rank points, rank B gives 2 rank points, and rank C gives 1 rank point.

In the game count rank point determination table shown in FIG. 114, when the game count is 199 or less, rank S and 4 rank points are given, and when the game count is 200 to 239, rank A and 3 rank points are given. If the game count is 240 to 299, rank B and 2 rank points are awarded, and if the game count is 300 or more, rank C and 1 rank point are awarded. That is, the table shown in FIG. 114 is defined such that the lower the game count, the higher the rank and rank points.

In addition, the game count is cleared when it shifts to a non-probability variable/time-saving state (that is, when the limit is reached, or when the special figure 2 8R (normal) hits the jackpot). Since the higher the game count, the lower the evaluation, unlike the number of JACs described later, the count starts from 0 even if the game is pulled back in the EX game. In this case, since the number of games is small and the number of JACs is likely to be large, the rank tends to be high at the time of withdrawal, so that it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the withdrawal.

In addition, the game count when the limit is not reached due to a fall on the way is fictitious based on the numerical value calculated based on the following formula.
{(game count at the time of falling) / (number of hits)} x 10

In other words, if you fall on the way and you do not reach the limit, calculate the average value of the game counts until you fall for one big hit, and if you assume that you hit 10 times, you will not reach the limit. Fake the game count at the time of arrival. It should be noted that the number of big hits in the above calculation formula does not include the big hits resulting in falling.

For example, if the game count at the time of falling is 100 and the number of big hits is 4, the game count is assumed to be (100/4)×10=250. Then, by applying the fictitious game count 250 to the table in FIG. 114, rank B and 2 rank points are given. In other words, if the game count of 100 at the time of falling is directly applied to the table of FIG. 114, the rank S and 4 rank points will be given, but naturally the game count at the time of falling will be less than when the limiter is reached. Therefore, the rank and rank points are corrected by using the fictitious game count as described above so as not to give an unreasonably high evaluation when falling.
In addition, during the JAC game, the game evaluation result is displayed even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the special figure 2 4R (normal) or the probability variation pattern (specific area easy pattern) . In this embodiment, since 4R (normal) of special figure 2 is a hitting operation and the jackpot period is short, the game evaluation result may be displayed during the jackpot.

When the sub CPU 201 ends this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1502.

In step S1502, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining rank points for the number of JACs. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the JAC number rank points based on the JAC number rank point determination table shown in FIG. Incidentally, the number of JAC means the number of times the big winning opening 540 is opened in the big winning game and the small winning game from the start of the current JAC game to the end of the variable probability. Also, the JAC number rank points refer to points indicating the evaluation made according to the numerical value of the JAC number.

FIG. 115 shows a table defining ranks and rank points for JAC numbers. The table shown in FIG. 115 defines ranks and rank points according to the number of JACs. Ranks are classified into four levels (S, A, B, and C), with S, A, B, and C in descending order of evaluation. Similarly, rank points are classified into 4 levels (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), and the higher the number (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), the higher the evaluation. It is. Ranks and rank points correspond to each other, and rank S gives 4 rank points, rank A gives 3 rank points, rank B gives 2 rank points, and rank C gives 1 rank point.

In the table shown in FIG. 115, when the number of JACs is 80 or more, rank S and 4 rank points are given, and when the number of JACs is 70 to 79, rank A and 3 rank points are given, and the number of JACs is If the number of JACs is 60 to 69, rank B and 2 rank points will be awarded, and if the number of JACs is 59 or less, rank C and 1 rank point will be awarded. That is, the table shown in FIG. 115 is defined such that the higher the number of JACs, the higher the rank and rank points.

In addition, the JAC number is cleared when it moves to a non-probable variable / time-saving state (that is, when the limit is reached, or when it falls due to the special figure 2 8R (normal) jackpot), and the non-probable variable / time-saving state If there is a big hit (retraction) in , the count is continued based on the number of JACs at the time of clearing.

When the sub CPU 201 has completed this process, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to step S1503.

In step S1503, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining rank points for the number of balls obtained during the JAC game. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the rank points for the number of balls to be played during the JAC game based on the rank point determination table for the number of balls to be played that is shown in FIG. The number of obtained balls (during the JAC game) refers to the number of obtained balls after the start of the current JAC game until the end of the variable probability. Also, the rank points of the number of obtained balls is a score indicating the evaluation made according to the numerical value of the number of obtained balls.

FIG. 116 shows a table defining ranks and rank points relating to the number of balls obtained during a JAC game. The table shown in FIG. 116 defines ranks and rank points according to the number of balls obtained during the JAC game. Ranks are classified into four levels (S, A, B, and C), with S, A, B, and C in descending order of evaluation. Similarly, rank points are classified into 4 levels (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), and the higher the number (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), the higher the evaluation. It is. Ranks and rank points correspond to each other, and rank S gives 4 rank points, rank A gives 3 rank points, rank B gives 2 rank points, and rank C gives 1 rank point.

In the table shown in FIG. 116, when the number of balls obtained during the JAC game is 5600 or more, rank S and 4 rank points are given, and when the number of balls obtained during the JAC game is 5000 to 5599, rank A is given. , 3 rank points will be given, and if the number of balls won during the JAC game is 4200 to 4999, rank B, 2 rank points will be given, and if the number of balls won during the JAC game is 4199 or less, rank C, 1 rank point is given. In other words, the table shown in FIG. 116 is defined such that the higher the number of balls obtained during the JAC game, the higher the rank and rank points.

In addition, the number of acquired balls is cleared when it shifts to a non-variable/time-saving state (that is, when it reaches the limit, or when it falls due to the 8R (normal) big hit of special figure 2). In addition, if there is a big hit (retraction) in the non-probability variable / time saving state, the count is continued based on the acquired balls at the time of clearing, and the total number of acquired balls is also continued.

The sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1504 when this process ends.

In step S1504, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining the overall rank. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the total rank based on the total rank determination table shown in FIG.

The overall rank is a rank obtained by comprehensively evaluating the rank points of the game count, the number of JACs, and the number of acquired balls. The sub CPU 201 calculates the total rank points by adding the rank points of the game count determined in steps S1501 to S1503, the rank points of the number of JACs, and the rank points of the number of obtained balls. Then, as shown in FIG. 117, the overall rank is determined according to the calculated total rank points.

In the table shown in FIG. 117, when the total rank points are 3 to 4 points, the total rank C is given, and when the total rank points are 5 to 8 points, the total rank B is given, and the total rank points are 9 to 9 points. In the case of 10 points, overall rank A is given, and in the case of total rank points of 11 to 12 points, overall rank S is given.

For example, if the game count from the start of the current JAC game to the end of the probability variation is 224, the number of JAC is 82, and the number of acquired balls is 5615, the rank points related to the game count are 3 points (see FIG. 114), Since the rank points related to the number of JACs are 4 points (see FIG. 115) and the rank points related to the number of balls played are 4 points (see FIG. 116), the total rank points is 11 points and the overall rank is S (see FIG. 116). 117).

When the sub CPU 201 ends this process, it ends the game evaluation process routine.

In the display control processing of step S1105 shown in FIG. 21, the sub CPU 201 performs control processing for displaying the game evaluation result calculated by the game evaluation processing shown in FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display a game evaluation result display screen including the game count, the number of JACs, the number of winning balls, and the total rank determined in step S1504 at the end of the variable probability. In the game evaluation result display screen, the total number of obtained balls obtained from entering the time saving state to exiting the time saving state is also displayed.

The sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display a game evaluation result display screen as shown in FIG. 118, for example. The game evaluation result display screen of FIG. 118 displays that the game count is 224, the number of JAC is 82, the number of acquired balls is 5615, the overall rank is S, and the total number of acquired balls is 44444.

Even when the player falls, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display the game evaluation result display screen at that time.

In this way, by presenting the player with a rank (overall rank) that comprehensively reflects various items related to the game such as the game count, the number of JACs, and the number of winning balls in the JAC game, the player can easily understand the JAC game. can improve the interest of

Also, the overall rank is calculated such that the higher the game count in the JAC game, the lower the evaluation, and the higher the JAC number and the number of winning balls in the JAC game, the higher the evaluation. Therefore, the higher the number of JACs and the number of balls obtained per one game count (variation display), the higher the overall rank. Therefore, if the number of JACs is large despite a small game count (variable display), or if a large number of balls are obtained despite a small game count (variable display), the overall rank will be highly evaluated. . In this way, not only the positive evaluation (the number of JAC and the number of winning balls) but also the negative evaluation (game count) are incorporated into the evaluation, so that the efficiency of the game can be evaluated, and the player can evaluate the JAC game. can improve the interest of

[Fraud detection]
The pachinko game machine 1 has a magnetic sensor (not shown) capable of detecting illegal magnetism. A magnetic sensor is provided to detect fraudulent behavior using a magnet (so-called fraudulent behavior). The magnetic sensor is configured to transmit a magnetic detection signal indicating detection of illegal magnetism to the main control circuit 100 when the amount of change in the strength of the magnetic field from the initial state is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold. ing.

[Initialization of magnetic sensor]
The magnetic sensor executes initialization processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. In the initialization process, the magnetic sensor sets a reference value that serves as a reference for determining whether or not illegal magnetism has been detected.

A specific description will be given below. The magnetic sensor is provided with an initialization terminal into which a signal (magnetic sensor initialization signal) from the main CPU 101 can be input. When the input to the initialization terminal is turned ON for 1 second (when the magnetic sensor initialization signal from the main CPU 101 is input for 1 second), the magnetic sensor stores the peripheral magnetic field of the magnetic sensor at that time as the initial state, The detected value of the initial state is set as the initial value.

Then, the magnetic sensor sets, as a reference value, a value obtained by adding a predetermined value corresponding to the amount of change in the magnetic field when a fraudulent act is performed to the set initial value. Therefore, if the initial value is large, the reference value will also be set to a large value.

[Fraud detection processing]
Next, fraud detection processing will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud detection process shown in FIG. 120 is performed in step S7001 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 120, in step S1511, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the magnetic sensor has detected illegal magnetism. In this process, when the main CPU 101 receives a magnetism detection signal from the magnetic sensor (that is, when the detection value of the magnetic sensor is equal to or greater than the reference value), it determines that illegal magnetism has been detected.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the magnetic sensor has detected illegal magnetism, the process proceeds to step S1512. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the magnetic sensor does not detect unauthorized magnetism, the main CPU 101 ends the unauthorized detection processing routine.

In step S1512, the main CPU 101 turns on the error status flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 turns on the error status flag stored in the main RAM 103 . If the error status flag is already on, it remains on. When the main CPU 101 ends this process, the process proceeds to step S1513.

In step S1513, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the notification setting command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and transmits it to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 . When this processing ends, the fraud detection processing routine ends.

By the notification setting process in step S1513, the main CPU 101 outputs a signal indicating detection of illegal magnetism to the outside of the gaming machine such as a hall computer through the external terminal board 320. FIG. Therefore, the store clerk can recognize that fact.

[Main CPU startup processing]
Next, the main CPU activation process will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU activation process shown in FIG. 121 is performed in the initialization process of step S10 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 121, in step S1521, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. In this process, the main CPU 101 makes this determination based on whether or not it has received a power ON signal from the power board connected to the power switch. When the main CPU 101 determines that the power is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1522. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power is not turned on, it terminates the main CPU startup processing routine.

The power switch is provided in the pachinko game machine 1 at a position where it can be turned ON/OFF by opening the door. When the power switch is turned on, a power ON signal is output to the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 and the payout/launch control circuit 300 from the power board connected to the power switch.

In step S1522, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the wait timer has elapsed. The wait timer of the main CPU 101 is set to a time sufficient to close the door. In this embodiment, the wait timer of the main CPU 101 is set to 10 seconds. When the main CPU 101 determines that the wait timer has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1523. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the wait timer has not elapsed, it terminates the main CPU startup processing routine.

As a result, the main CPU 101 enters a standby state (waits for activation) without performing a process described later for a preset wait timer (10 seconds).

In step S1523, the main CPU 101 performs magnetic sensor initialization signal ON processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a magnetic sensor initialization signal for instructing the magnetic sensor to perform the initialization process (which triggers the magnetic sensor to perform the initialization process) to the initialization terminal of the magnetic sensor for one second. . When the main CPU 101 ends this process, the process proceeds to step S1524.

In step S1524, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting processing at startup. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1525. The movable piece 7220 driven at a constant cycle in the game ball sorting device 7200 described above is managed by the main CPU 101, and starts its operation after the initial setting is executed in this step.

In step S1525, the main CPU 101 performs processing for shifting to a playable state. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the main CPU activation process routine.

[Payment/launch control circuit activation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the payout/launch control circuit activation process will be described. The payout/launch control circuit activation process shown in FIG. 122 is performed in the initialization process of the payout/launch control circuit 300 .

As shown in FIG. 122, in step S1531, the payout/launch control circuit 300 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. In this process, the payout/launch control circuit 300 makes this determination depending on whether or not it has received a power ON signal from the power board connected to the power switch. When the payout/launch control circuit 300 determines that the power is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1532. On the other hand, when the payout/launch control circuit 300 determines that the power is not turned on, it ends the payout/launch control circuit startup processing routine.

In step S1532, the payout/launch control circuit 300 determines whether or not the wait timer has elapsed. The wait timer of the payout/launch control circuit 300 is set to a time longer than the sum of the wait timer (10 seconds) of the main CPU 101 and the output time (1 second) of the magnetic sensor initialization signal. In this embodiment, the wait timer of the payout/launch control circuit 300 is set to 12 seconds. When the payout/launch control circuit 300 determines that the wait timer has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1533. On the other hand, when the payout/launch control circuit 300 determines that the wait timer has not elapsed, it ends the payout/launch control circuit startup processing routine.

As a result, the payout/launch control circuit 300 enters a standby state (waits for activation) without performing the processing described later during the preset wait timer (12 seconds).

In step S1533, the payout/launch control circuit 300 performs initial setting processing at startup. In this process, the payout/launch control circuit 300 sets the driving member (motor or the like for performing the operation of paying out game balls) of the payout device 340 to the initial position. When this process ends, the payout/launch control circuit 300 shifts the process to step S1534.

In step S1534, the payout/launch control circuit 300 performs processing for shifting to a playable state. When this process ends, the payout/launch control circuit 300 ends the payout/launch control circuit activation process routine.

[Sub CPU startup processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the sub CPU activation process will be described. The sub-CPU activation process shown in FIG. 123 is performed in the initialization process of step S1101 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 123, in step S1541, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. In this process, the sub CPU 201 makes this determination depending on whether or not it has received a power ON signal from the power board connected to the power switch. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the power has been turned on, the process proceeds to step S1542. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the power is not turned on, it ends the sub CPU startup processing routine.

In step S1542, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the wait timer has elapsed. The wait timer of the sub CPU 201 is set to a time longer than the sum of the wait timer of the main CPU 101 (10 seconds) and the output time of the magnetic sensor initialization signal (1 second). In this embodiment, the wait timer of the sub CPU 201 is set to 12 seconds. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the wait timer has elapsed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1543. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the wait timer has not elapsed, it terminates the sub CPU startup processing routine.

As a result, the sub CPU 201 enters a standby state (waits for activation) without performing the process described later for the preset wait timer (12 seconds).

In step S1543, the sub CPU 201 performs initial setting processing at startup. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs the driving operation by confirming the operation of the driving members such as the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83. , and then set to the initial position by returning to the initial position. In addition, there is a sensor for position detection at the initial position, and each movable accessory unit is provided with a detected part corresponding to the sensor for detection, so that it can be detected that it has returned to the initial position. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1544.

In step S1544, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for shifting to a playable state. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub CPU activation process routine.

Next, referring to FIG. 124, the timing of the initialization process by the magnetic sensor will be explained while comparing it with the timing of the initialization process of the payout/launch control circuit 300 and the sub CPU 201. FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 outputs a magnetic sensor initialization signal (see step S1523 in FIG. 121) for 1 second after waiting 10 seconds for activation. When the magnetic sensor initialization signal output from the main CPU 101 is turned on for one second, the magnetic sensor stores the peripheral magnetic field at that time as an initial state, and sets the detected value of the initial state as the initial value.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 and the payout/launch control circuit 300 perform initial setting processing after waiting for 12 seconds. In other words, the sub CPU 201 and the payout/launch control circuit 300 perform initial setting processing after initializing the magnetic sensor.

Here, assuming that the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed during the initial setting of the sub CPU 201 and the payout/launch control circuit 300, the initialization process of the sub CPU 201 and the payout/launch control circuit 300 is performed during the initialization process of the magnetic sensor. The setting (setting the drive member to the initial position) may increase the magnetic field around the magnetic sensor. If the peripheral magnetic field is detected and the initial value of the magnetic sensor is set to a relatively large value, the reference value of the magnetic sensor also becomes a relatively large value accordingly. As a result, even in a situation where it should be determined that fraudulent magnetism has been detected due to fraudulent activity using magnets, a situation may occur in which fraudulent magnetism cannot be detected because it is determined to be below the reference value. In addition, the magnetic sensor is installed so that it can mainly detect the lower periphery of the game board such as the start opening, and normally it is not generated by the driving means etc. when the driving member is moving from the upper side to the lower side of the game board. A magnetic field may be generated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the initial setting process of the sub CPU 201 and the payout/launch control circuit 300 is executed at a timing that does not overlap with the initialization process of the magnetic sensor. wait to be done. In other words, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initial setting process of the sub CPU 201 and the payout/launch control circuit 300 . Therefore, the magnetic sensor is connected to the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, the third movable accessory unit 83, and other accessories, and the driving member of the payout device 340 (game In a state in which all drive systems such as motors, etc., are stopped, the peripheral magnetic field at that time is stored as the initial state, and the detected value of the initial state is set as the initial value. .

Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving the driving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the initial value and the reference value of the magnetic sensor from being set unduly high. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate fraud detection.

In addition, the wait timer (10 seconds) of the main CPU 101 is set so that, in the case of a pachinko game machine, the outer frame and the main body are opened, and in the case of a pachislot game machine, the housing and the front door are opened. Since the time is set to be long enough to close the door, etc., when the door is closed, the magnetic sensor initialization processing is (considered) performed with the door closed. Therefore, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the original usage state, so appropriate fraud detection can be performed.
Note that the initialization process may be performed during the period of the wait timer as long as the timing does not overlap with the initialization process of the magnetic sensor.

[Main CPU activation processing according to the second embodiment]
Next, main CPU activation processing according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125 .

In the main CPU activation process shown in FIG. 125, the processes from steps S1551 to S1554 are the same as the processes from steps S1521 to S1524 shown in FIG.

In step S<b>1555 , the main CPU 101 transmits an activation command to the sub CPU 201 and the payout/emission control circuit 300 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1556.

In step S1556, the main CPU 101 performs processing for shifting to a playable state. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the main CPU activation process routine according to the second embodiment.

[Payout/launch control circuit activation process according to the second embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the payout/emission control circuit activation process according to the second embodiment will be described.

In the payout/emission control circuit activation process shown in FIG. 126, the process of step S1561 is the same as the process of step S1531 shown in FIG.

In step S1562, the payout/launch control circuit 300 determines whether or not an activation command from the main CPU 101 has been received. When the payout/launch control circuit 300 determines that the activation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1563. On the other hand, when the payout/emission control circuit 300 determines that the activation command has not been received, it ends the payout/emission control circuit activation processing routine according to the second embodiment.

In step S1563, the payout/launch control circuit 300 performs initial setting processing at startup. When this process ends, the payout/launch control circuit 300 shifts the process to step S1564.

In step S1564, the payout/launch control circuit 300 performs processing for shifting to a playable state. When this process ends, the payout/launch control circuit 300 ends the payout/launch control circuit activation process routine according to the second embodiment.

[Sub CPU activation processing according to the second embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the sub CPU activation process according to the second embodiment will be described.

In the sub CPU activation process shown in FIG. 127, the process of step S1571 is the same as the process of step S1541 shown in FIG.

In step S1572, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a start command from the main CPU 101 has been received. If the sub CPU 201 determines that it has received the activation command, it moves the process to step S1573. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that it has not received the activation command, it terminates the sub CPU activation processing routine according to the second embodiment.

In step S1573, the sub CPU 201 performs initial setting processing at startup. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1574.

In step S1574, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for shifting to a playable state. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub CPU activation process routine.

Thus, also in the second embodiment, the initialization processing of the sub CPU 201 and the payout/emission control circuit 300 is performed after the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor. In other words, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initial setting process of the sub CPU 201 and the payout/launch control circuit 300 . Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, the initial value of the magnetic sensor and the reference value are prevented from being set unduly high. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate fraud detection.

[Production processing based on specific winning]
Next, a specific winning effect that is normally performed will be described.

A specific winning effect is an effect in which a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 when a game ball wins a prize in a predetermined starting hole. Specific prize-winning effect is displayed in normal time (non-probable variable/non-time saving state). In the present embodiment, the predetermined starting port is, for example, one of the two first starting ports (advantageous outward path 7072b on the side of the base plate and starting port 7071a) of the starting port unit 7070 shown in FIG. point to

In addition, as described above, in the two first starting ports, when the winner of the base plate side advantageous outward route 7072b (when passing the advantageous course) wins the starting port 7071a (when passing the disadvantageous course) It is set so that you can get more prize balls than. In this way, when a game ball wins on the board-side advantageous forward path 7072b, a predetermined performance image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16, thereby informing the player that many prize balls have been won. can be done. In addition, below, the winning of the game ball to the base plate side advantageous going route 7072b may be referred to as "specific winning".

An example of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when a specific winning effect is performed will be shown below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 128, the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a symbol variation display area 1021 and a specific winning effect display area 1022 in a normal game (non-probability variation/non-time-saving state).

The symbol variation display area 1021 is a display area in which variation display of three identification symbols is performed. The pattern variation display area 1021 is provided so as to occupy approximately the upper half of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 . In this way, the symbol variation display area 1021 is set so that the player can easily visually recognize the variation display of the three identification symbols.

A specific winning effect display area 1022 is provided in the lower central portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 . In the example shown in FIG. 128, the characters "GOOD" are displayed in the specific winning effect display area 1022 (the specific winning effect is being performed) due to the specific winning effect. The characters of "GOOD" in the specific winning effect are erased after a predetermined period of time has passed.

Even if there is a specific winning effect, the specific winning effect is not performed during a predetermined ready-to-win effect. In this embodiment, the predetermined condition is, for example, a reach-for-dark effect (not shown). The dark change ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened, like the first effect in the first look-ahead effect as described above. In such a ready-to-win effect, when the characters "GOOD" are displayed, the effect in the darkened state is hindered. Therefore, in such a case, the specific winning effect is not performed.

Specific winning effect determination processing for determining whether or not to perform a specific winning effect will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129 .

The specific winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 129 is performed within the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 94(a)) by the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) as described above.

In step S1581, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a normal game (non-probability variation/non-time-saving state). When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a normal game (non-probability variation/non-time-saving state), the process proceeds to step S1582. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that it is not a normal game (non-probability variation/non-time-saving state), it ends the specific winning effect determination process.

In step S1582, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a specific winning (a winning of a game ball to the base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b). When the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a specific prize winning, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1583. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no specific winning effect, the sub CPU 201 ends the specific winning effect determination process.

In step S1583, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the dark reach reach effect is being performed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is not during the dark reach effect, the process proceeds to step S1584. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the dark ready-to-win effect is being executed, it ends the specific winning effect determination process. In other words, in this case, the specific prize effect is not performed even though the specific prize has been won.

In step S1584, the sub CPU 201 determines to perform a specific winning effect. In this way, the specific winning effect is performed, and the characters "GOOD" are displayed in the specific winning effect display area 1022 of the liquid crystal display device 16. - 特許庁After this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the specific winning effect determination process.

In the present embodiment, as the predetermined ready-to-win effect, the black-out ready-to-reach effect was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

[Always look ahead for fluctuation patterns in specific conditions]

Next, the look-ahead of the fluctuation pattern in a constant specific state will be described.

In the prior art, based on the game state and the variation pattern selection state at the time of the pending winning, the determination of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss (for the big hit, it is determined respectively in the special figure high probability and the special figure low probability), and the hit When judging the winning pattern (implemented for those who hit a big hit or a small hit in either state, regardless of whether it is high or low probability), or judgment of the variation pattern (the above two (implemented based on the judgment results). In addition, it is common to perform these prefetch judgments in the state at the time of pending winning, but considering the order of pending digestion, the game that performs prefetch judgment in the game state that is assumed to stay when it actually fluctuates There is also a machine.

If you want to predict what kind of variation will be selected under specific conditions (for example, a variation pattern selection state where only four rotations after a big hit are selected) when the held ball actually varies, If the main control circuit 100 makes a decision considering the number of fluctuations until the reserved ball is consumed, the order of consumption, the transition of the game state due to the big hit in the reserved state, etc., the program capacity required for the decision increases. there is a point Therefore, the determination by the main control circuit 100 is made into a simple program so that the sub-control circuit 200 side can determine whether or not to use the determination result of the main control circuit 100 .

Specifically, the following method is adopted.

In the main control circuit 100, in addition to the usual look-ahead determination, regardless of whether there is a possibility of actually shifting to that state, a lottery is performed to determine what will happen if it fluctuates under specific conditions. That is, in addition to judging a big hit, a small hit, and a loss, judging a winning pattern in the case of a hit, and judging a variation pattern, a fluctuation pattern under specific conditions is determined. In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific condition is limited to "4 rotations immediately after the end of the jackpot when the probability is changing after the jackpot". , determination of a small hit or a loss”, only when ``a big win occurs in a high probability'', a variation pattern is determined as a big hit, and in other cases, a variation pattern is determined as a loss.

Further, on the sub-control circuit 200 side, only in a predetermined state (here, only at the start of the big win during the probability change), the variation pattern information of the four rotations immediately after the big win is used when the probability is changed after the big win. Further, on the sub-control circuit 200 side, the fluctuation pattern information for normal pre-reading determination is used in other states. In addition, there is no lottery for whether or not to perform the holding consecutive production at the time of the big hit during normal.

In addition, check the hold of the special figure 2 in order from the previous hold, and from each hold, obtain the variation pattern in "4 rotations immediately after the end of the jackpot when it becomes a probability change after the jackpot", and based on the variation pattern information A lottery table for whether or not to carry out a holding series performance is determined. It is also used for determining whether or not there is a specific loss variation pattern for determining whether or not to perform a performance suggesting a holding group in the performance during the big win in the big win during the probability change. In addition, check the hold of the special figure 2 in order from the previous hold, and from each hold, obtain the variation pattern in "4 rotations immediately after the end of the jackpot when it becomes a probability change after the jackpot", and based on the variation pattern information It is determined whether or not a specific loss variation pattern is in front of the big hit variation, and whether or not to carry out a holding continuous performance is determined.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, the technique of the gaming machine that changes the length of time of the ending effect performed when the jackpot game ends is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-198776).

The above publication discloses a gaming machine that changes the length of time of the ending effect according to the state of winning of a game ball in a specific area during a jackpot game.

However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that the time management of the effect becomes complicated because the time of the ending effect changes depending on the game situation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that facilitates time management of presentations.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls can roll, a first position where game balls are easy to win, and a second position where game balls are difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (a winning device) having a shutter 610 (displacement member) that can be displaced to a position, a first and second start opening (passing area) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the game ball passing through the first and second starting ports (passing area), and the shutter 610 according to the determination result based on the starting information A main control circuit 100 (hitting game control means) capable of executing a winning game that displaces the (displacement member) to the first position, and a main capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player after the winning game A control circuit 100 (specific game control means), a liquid crystal display device 16 (display means) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the starting information, and a main control circuit capable of stop display after the identification information is variably displayed. 100 (identification information control means) and a sub-control circuit 200 (performance control means) for controlling an effect, wherein the winning game is performed by pressing the shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the main control circuit 100 (hitting game control means) has a predetermined end interval period after the round game ends. The jackpot game (hit game) is ended after the elapse, and the main control circuit 100 (identification information control means), after the jackpot game (hit game) is finished, identifies the identification information based on the starting information. Variable display is possible, and the sub-control circuit 200 (performance control means) controls the jackpot game during the end interval period when the probability variable game (specific game) is executed after the jackpot game (hit game) is completed. Along with executing the end production of (hit game), start the production related to the probability variation game (specific game) after the end of the jackpot game (hit game), and after the jackpot game (hit game is completed, the probability variation game (specific game ) is not executed, the ED performance (end production) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the time management of the presentation.

Specifically, when the limit is reached, the ED performance is not terminated at the timing when the jackpot game is terminated (timing when the termination interval period is terminated), but is continued until the middle of the next first variation. As a result, for example, even if all the end interval periods set by the sub CPU 201 are set to be the same, the ED effect is performed in a short period when the limit is not reached, and the ED effect (result display) is performed when the limit is reached. effect and EX game transition effect) can be performed in a long period (for example, 15 seconds).

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls can roll, a first position where game balls are easy to win, and a second position where game balls are difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) having a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member), a first and second start opening (passing area) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the first・The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the game ball passing through the second starting port (passing area), and the shutter 610 (displacement A main control circuit 100 (hitting game control means) capable of executing a winning game displacing the member) to the first position, and a main control circuit capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player after the winning game is completed. 100 (specific game control means), a liquid crystal display device 16 (display means) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the starting information, and a main control circuit 100 ( identification information control means) and a sub-control circuit 200 (performance control means) for controlling a performance, wherein the winning game is performed after the start of the winning game, the shutter 610 (displacement member) has a round game that displaces from the second position to the first position, and the main control circuit 100 (hitting game control means) has passed a predetermined end interval period after the round game ends After the jackpot game (hit game) is ended, the main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the starting information after the jackpot game (hit game) is finished. It is possible, and the sub-control circuit 200 (performance control means) controls the jackpot game (hit game) ED production (end production) is executed, the production related to the probability variation game (specific game) is started after the jackpot game (hit game) is completed, and the probability variation game is completed after the jackpot game (hit game) is completed. When the (specific game) is not executed, the ED production of the jackpot game (hit game) from the end interval period to at least a part of the first fluctuation display of the identification information after the jackpot game (hit game) ends. Execute (end effect),
The period from the start of the first identification information change after the end of the jackpot game (hit game) to the end of the ED effect (end effect) of the jackpot game (hit game) (in this embodiment, 10 seconds) It is characterized by being longer than the end interval period (5 seconds in this embodiment).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the time management of the presentation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the period during which the EX game transition effect is performed (from the start of the first identification information change after the end of the jackpot game to the end of the ED effect of the jackpot game is longer than the end interval period in which the result display effect is performed. period) is a longer period, it is possible to make relatively diverse effects for notifying that the next EX game will start. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even though the game state shifts from the probability variable/time-saving state to the non-probability variable/time-saving state to a disadvantageous game state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls can roll, a first position where game balls are easy to win, and a second position where game balls are difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) having a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member), a first and second start opening (passing area) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the first・The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the game ball passing through the second starting port (passing area), and the shutter 610 (displacement A main control circuit 100 (hitting game control means) capable of executing a winning game displacing the member) to the first position, and a main control circuit capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player after the winning game is completed. 100 (specific game control means), a liquid crystal display device 16 (display means) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the starting information, and a main control circuit 100 ( identification information control means) and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) for controlling effects, wherein the specific game is a game that can be selected as the specific game. The circuit 100 (hitting game determination means) has a probability variation game that can be executed with a higher probability than a normal game for determining whether or not to generate the winning game, and the winning game is after the start of the winning game. It has a round game that displaces the shutter 610 (displacement member) from the second position to the first position, and the main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) has a predetermined number after the round game ends. After the end interval period has passed, the jackpot game (hit game) is ended, and the main control circuit 100 (identification information control means), after the jackpot game (hit game) is finished, based on the starting information, The identification information can be variably displayed, and the sub-control circuit 200 (performance control means), when the probability variable game (specific game) is executed after the jackpot game (hit game) ends, the end interval period , the end production of the jackpot game (hit game) is executed, the production of the probability variable game (specific game) is started after the jackpot game (hit game) is finished, and the jackpot game (hit game) is finished. When the probability variable game (specific game) is not executed, at least part of the variable display of the first identification information after the end of the jackpot game (hit game) from the end interval period The ED effect (end effect) of the jackpot game (win game) is executed over a period, and the variable display of the first identification information is displayed more than the normal game before the jackpot game (win game) is executed. It is characterized in that it is performed in a predetermined manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the time management of the presentation.

In addition, a player who is under the impression that the jackpot game is still continuing (that is, the variation display of the next first variation has not started) actually feels uncomfortable when visually recognizing the variation display. You can avoid receiving That is, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, when the limit is reached, the ED production is not ended at the timing of the end of the jackpot game, but is continued until the middle of the next first variation, but it is not limited to this. do not have. Specifically, when the limit is reached, the ED effect may be terminated at the timing when the next variation display of the first variation is terminated, or may be continued until the second variation and thereafter.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, the technique of a gaming machine that performs a holding consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that a big win is included in the holding during the production of a big hit game is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-150093).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine that performs a holding consecutive suggestion production that suggests that a big win is included in the holding as a big winning production during the big winning round game.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has the same timing of suggesting a holding series, so there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls can roll, a first position where game balls are easy to win, and a second position where game balls are difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (a winning device) having a shutter 610 (displacement member) that can be displaced to a position, a first and second start opening (passing area) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the game ball passing through the first and second starting openings (passing area), and the above-mentioned A main control circuit 100 (hitting game control means) capable of executing a winning game that displaces the shutter 610 (displacement member) to the first position, and a liquid crystal display capable of displaying identification information determined based on the starting information. 16 (image display means), a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stop-displaying the identification information after it is variably displayed, and a sub-control circuit capable of determining the content of the effect to be executed based on the start information. 200 (effect content determining means), and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) capable of executing effect control based on the effect content determined by the sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means). The sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) causes the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means) to display a suspended ball (starting information image), and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means) displays the holding ball (starting information image) when the starting information is specific starting information. It is possible to decide to execute a first effect (first specific effect) during a period from after it is determined to be performed to before the start of the variable display based on the specific start information, and the specific effect In connection with the execution of the variable display of the identification information based on the starting information, a second effect (second specific effect) is produced based on the starting information stored in the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means). ), and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) executes the first effect (first specific effect), and then the second effect (second specific effect) is executable.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the first effect ends, a darkened screen is displayed, and when the second effect starts, the effect (EF ) is displayed. Thus, the effect mode when the first effect ends and the effect mode when the second effect starts are substantially the same effect mode. In this way, by combining the first effect of darkening the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the second effect of using the effect on the screen darkened by the first effect to make a predetermined character stand out and appear, the first effect can be obtained. It is possible to suggest a holding series without causing a sense of incongruity in the connection between the performance and the second performance. In this way, without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, the effects of the combination of black and high-luminance light particles (that is, the first effect that makes the effect content of the second effect stand out) Related production) can improve the interest of the player.

Further, the specific starting information is starting information determined to be the winning game, and the second effect (second specific effect) is a specific effect for executing the first effect (first specific effect). This is executed during the variable display of the identification information based on the starting information.

According to such a configuration, when the second effect is executed, the player is made to recognize that the current situation is during the variable display of the identification information based on the specific starting information for executing the first effect. can be done. In this way, interest can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls can roll, a first position where game balls are easy to win, and a second position where game balls are difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) having a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member), a first and second start opening (passing area) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the first・The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the game ball passing through the second starting port (passing area), and the shutter 610 (displacement A main control circuit 100 (hitting game control means) capable of executing a winning game displacing the member) to the first position, and a liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means), a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stop-displaying after the identification information is variably displayed, and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means) and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) capable of executing effect control based on the effect content determined by the sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means), The sub-control circuit 200 (performance control means) displays a suspended ball (starting information image) based on the starting information stored in the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) on the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means). The sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means) can display the holding ball (starting information image) when the starting information is the first specific starting information. It is possible to decide to execute a first effect (first specific effect) during a period from after the determination to before the start of the variable display based on the first specific start information, and the first specific start Depending on whether or not the second specific start information (big hit) is stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) in relation to the execution of the variable display of the identification information based on the information It is possible to decide to execute a second effect (second specific effect) that can change the effect content to a specific effect content, and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) controls the first effect (first specific effect) is executed, the second effect (second specific effect) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the first effect ends, a darkened screen is displayed, and when the second effect starts, the effect (EF ) is displayed. Thus, the effect mode when the first effect ends and the effect mode when the second effect starts are substantially the same effect mode. In this way, by combining the first effect of darkening the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the second effect of using the effect on the screen darkened by the first effect to make a predetermined character stand out and appear, the first effect can be obtained. It is possible to suggest a holding series without causing a sense of incongruity in the connection between the performance and the second performance. In this way, without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, the effects of the combination of black and high-luminance light particles (that is, the first effect that makes the effect content of the second effect stand out) Related production) can improve the interest of the player.
In addition, the content of the second effect is changed according to whether or not the ball on hold in the ball on hold display area 1200 is a big hit. Specifically, when the held ball in the held ball display area 1200 is a big hit, an appearance effect is performed, and when the held ball in the retained ball display area 1200 is lost, a false effect is performed. Since various effects can be performed in this manner, the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, the first specific starting information is starting information determined to be the winning game, and the second effect (second specific effect) is the first effect (first specific effect) for executing the first effect (first specific effect). This is executed during the variable display of the identification information based on the 1 specific start information.

According to such a configuration, when the second effect is executed, the player is made to recognize that the current situation is during the variable display of the identification information based on the first specific start information for executing the first effect. be able to. In this way, interest can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls can roll, a first position where game balls are easy to win, and a second position where game balls are difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) having a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member), a first and second start opening (passing area) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the first・The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the game ball passing through the second starting port (passing area), and the shutter 610 (displacement A main control circuit 100 (hitting game control means) capable of executing a winning game displacing the member) to the first position, and a liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means), a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stop-displaying after the identification information is variably displayed, and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means) and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) capable of executing effect control based on the effect content determined by the sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means), The sub-control circuit 200 (performance control means) displays a suspended ball (starting information image) based on the starting information stored in the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) on the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means). The sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means) can display the holding ball (starting information image) when the starting information is the first specific starting information. A first effect (first specific effect) executed during a period from after the determination to before the start of the variable display based on the first specific start information, and the identification information based on the first specific start information. It is possible to decide to execute a second effect (second specific effect) that is executed during the variable display of the identification information, and is related to the execution of the variable display of the identification information based on the first specific start information Then, when the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) stores the second specific starting information (jackpot) and satisfies a predetermined condition (see FIG. 104), the second effect (second specific effect) can be executed to change the effect content (to fake effect or appearance effect), and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) can execute the first effect (first specific effect) After executing the second effect (the second specific effect) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the content of the second effect is changed according to whether or not the ball on hold in the ball on hold display area 1200 is a big hit. Specifically, when the held ball in the held ball display area 1200 is a big hit, an appearance effect is performed, and when the held ball in the retained ball display area 1200 is lost, a false effect is performed. Furthermore, even if the held ball in the held ball display area 1200 is a big hit, for example, if the held ball displayed in the held ball display area 1200 has a hit type of hit operation, The performance content of the second performance is not changed from fake performance to appearance performance. Since various effects can be performed in this manner, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Note that the mutual relationship between the first effect and the second effect is not limited to the relationship according to the present embodiment (the relationship between the second effect and the first effect that makes the effect content of the second effect stand out). . For example, a part of the effect image displayed in the first effect may be displayed in the second effect, and even if the effect images are completely different, the effect images displayed in the first effect and the second effect may be displayed in the second effect. They may be conceptually related.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a jackpot game, a technology of a gaming machine that executes a special effect different from a normal jackpot effect is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-213104).

The above publication discloses a gaming machine that executes a special effect different from a normal big win effect when a game ball enters a general winning hole during a big win game.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the dedicated effect is displayed only once in one big win game, which is uninteresting.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls can roll, a first position where game balls are easy to win, and a second position where game balls are difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (a winning device) having a shutter 610 (displacement member) that can be displaced to a position, a first and second start opening (passing area) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the game ball passing through the first and second starting ports (passing area), and the shutter 610 according to the determination result based on the starting information A main control circuit 100 (hitting game control means) capable of executing a winning game that displaces the (displacement member) to the first position, and a liquid crystal display device 16 capable of displaying identification information determined based on the starting information ( (image display means), a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stop-displaying the identification information after the variable display, and the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means). and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means), wherein the winning game includes a first winning game capable of starting a specific game after the winning game ends, and the winning game has a small winning game (second winning game) that does not newly start the specific game after the completion of the above, and the sub control circuit 200 (performance control means) is the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage Means) stores the specific starting information for generating the first winning game (8R jackpot game), what is the first specific effect executed when the specific starting information is not stored? A different second specific effect (second look-ahead effect, especially series holding continuous effect) can be executed, but before the specific start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) When the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) stores the starting information that the small winning game (second winning game) occurs, the second specific effect (second look-ahead effect, especially a series of holding series It is characterized by not executing production).

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

Specifically, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the impression that the 8R (variable probability) jackpot of the first set and the 8R (variable probability) jackpot of the second set are continuous (series) (that is, It is possible to give the player an impression of a 16R (variable probability) jackpot. On the other hand, when a small winning game is played between the 8R (variable probability) jackpot of the first set and the 8R (variable probability) jackpot of the second set, 2 seconds after the end of the 8R (variable probability) jackpot of the first set. It is not possible to produce an effect as if the start of the 8R (variable probability) jackpot of the set continues. Therefore, even in a state where the second look-ahead effect can be performed, if a small hit hold ball is displayed between two 8R (variable probability) hold balls, the second look-ahead effect is performed. has been discontinued. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, the technique of a gaming machine that performs a holding consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that a big win is included in the holding during the production of a big hit game is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-150093).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine that performs a holding consecutive suggestion production that suggests that a big win is included in the holding as a big winning production during the big winning round game.

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has the same timing of suggesting a holding series, so there is a problem that the game lacks interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which game balls can roll, a first position where game balls are easy to win, and a second position where game balls are difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (a winning device) having a shutter 610 (displacement member) that can be displaced to a position, a first and second start opening (passing area) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the game ball passing through the first and second starting ports (passing area), and the shutter 610 according to the determination result based on the starting information A main control circuit 100 (hitting game control means) capable of executing a winning game that displaces the (displacement member) to the first position, and a liquid crystal display device 16 capable of displaying identification information determined based on the starting information ( display means), a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stopping display after changing the identification information, and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) for controlling effects. There, the hit game is a hit game (specific jackpot game), which is a jackpot game in which the hit game (specific game) starts after the hit game ends, and the hit game (specific game) after the hit game ends. a non-specific jackpot game, which is a jackpot game that does not start a game), and a small jackpot game that does not newly start the variable probability game (specific game) after the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot game occurs, When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the main control circuit 100 (counting means) capable of accumulating and counting the number of occurrences, and the main control circuit 100 (counting means) resetting the count value by the counting means when the non-specific jackpot game occurs count value reset means), and when the count value exceeds a predetermined value, after the jackpot game is completed, the sub-control circuit 200 (effect During the small winning game, if the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) stores specific starting information for causing the big winning game, the control means) controls the special electric role product 600 (winning device ) based on the fact that the game ball has won a winning combination (specific production), but the count value exceeds a predetermined value due to the occurrence of a jackpot game based on the specific start information. In this case, the holding continuation suggesting effect (specific effect) is not executed.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

Specifically, the holding series can be performed in a case where even if the holding series suggesting effect is performed, the interest of the player is not spoiled. Thus, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, technology of gaming machines capable of displaying evaluation results of games played by players is publicly known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8978).

The above publication discloses a gaming machine capable of displaying rankings of the number of consecutive games and the number of winning balls during a specific period.

However, the conventional pachinko machine described above only displays the number of consecutive games and the number of winning balls, which is uninteresting.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes winning game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a winning game advantageous to the player, and notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display) capable of notifying predetermined information. 16), which comprises positive evaluation result calculation means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for calculating a positive evaluation result for a game result during a predetermined period; and game result during the predetermined period. a negative evaluation result calculation means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that calculates a negative evaluation result for the means (e.g., sub CPU 201), and the notification means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 16) reports the overall evaluation result calculated by the overall evaluation result calculation means (e.g., , overall rank).

In addition, the winning game includes a specific winning game (eg, a variable probability game) that starts a specific game (eg, a variable probability game) that is advantageous to the player after the completion of the winning game, and the winning game occurs, When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a counting means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of counting the accumulated number of occurrences is provided. After the winning game is finished, the transition control to the specific game (for example, probability variation game) is not performed, and as the end condition of the predetermined period, the value counted by the counting means is the predetermined value (for example, limit number of times), and the predetermined condition is that the value counted by the counting means exceeds the predetermined value. It is characterized by being included.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the overall rank is calculated such that the higher the number of balls obtained during the JAC game, the higher the evaluation, and the higher the game count during the JAC game, the lower the evaluation. be done. In this way, not only the positive evaluation (the number of balls obtained during the JAC game) but also the negative evaluation (the game count during the JAC game) are incorporated into the ranking, thereby increasing the player's interest in the JAC game. can.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes winning game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a winning game advantageous to the player, and specific game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player. For example, a game comprising a main CPU 101), an image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of controlling the image display means a game number counting means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of accumulating and counting the number of games during the period of the specific game; and accumulating and counting the number of times of the winning game during the period of the specific game. Possible winning game number counting means (for example, sub CPU 201); awarded value counting means (for example, sub CPU 201) for counting the value given to the player by the winning game during the period of the specific game; A number-of-games evaluation calculation means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of calculating a number-of-games evaluation based on the counting result of the number-of-times counting means, and an assigned value evaluation capable of calculating an assigned value evaluation based on the counting results of the assigned value counting means. Calculating means (for example, sub CPU 201); Winning game number evaluation calculating means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of calculating the winning game number evaluation based on the counting result of the winning game number counting means; and a comprehensive evaluation calculation means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of calculating a comprehensive evaluation (for example, a total rank) of a game played by a player based on the given value evaluation calculation means and the winning game number evaluation calculation means. , wherein the overall evaluation calculation means can calculate the overall evaluation over a plurality of stages from a low evaluation stage to a high evaluation stage, ) is calculated to be higher, the evaluation of the number of winning games is calculated to be higher as the count value (for example, the number of JAC) by the number of winning game counting means is larger, and the count value by the number of game counting means ( For example, the larger the game count, the lower the game count evaluation is calculated, and the effect control means displays the overall evaluation on the image display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. is.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

Specifically, the overall rank is calculated such that the higher the count value (the number of balls won in the JAC game) by the given value counting means and the count value (the number of JAC) by the win game number counting means, the higher the evaluation. , the higher the count value (the game count during the JAC game) by the number-of-games counting means, the lower the evaluation. In this way, not only the positive evaluation (the number of balls obtained during the JAC game and the game count) but also the negative evaluation (the game count) are incorporated into the ranking, so that the player's interest in the JAC game can be improved. .

In addition, the main CPU 101 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the winning game control means and the specific game control means.
Further, the sub CPU 201 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of effect control means, game number counting means, imparted value counting means, evaluation result calculation means, and winning game number counting means.
Further, the liquid crystal display device 16 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the image display means.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the sub CPU 201 may display not only the overall rank but also the ranks of the game count, the number of JACs, and the number of winning balls on the game evaluation result display screen. Thereby, the player can know the game evaluation result in more detail.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes winning game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a winning game advantageous to the player, and notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display) capable of notifying predetermined information. 16), which comprises positive evaluation result calculation means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for calculating a positive evaluation result for a game result during a predetermined period; and game result during the predetermined period. Negative evaluation result calculation means (e.g., sub CPU 201) for calculating a negative evaluation result for, and based on the positive evaluation result and the negative evaluation result, an overall evaluation (e.g., overall rank) during the predetermined period Comprehensive evaluation result calculation means (for example, sub CPU 201) to calculate, the positive evaluation result calculation means is a given value evaluation capable of calculating the given value evaluation based on the value given to the player by the winning game Calculation means (for example, sub CPU 201) is included, and the negative evaluation result calculation means includes game number evaluation calculation means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of calculating the game number evaluation based on the number of games played during the predetermined period. , wherein the notifying means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 16) notifies the overall evaluation result (e.g., overall rank) calculated by the overall evaluation result calculating means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is something to do.

In addition, the winning game includes a specific winning game (eg, a variable probability game) that starts a specific game (eg, a variable probability game) that is advantageous to the player after the completion of the winning game, and the winning game occurs, When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a counting means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of counting the accumulated number of occurrences is provided. After the winning game is finished, the transition control to the specific game (for example, probability variation game) is not performed, and as the end condition of the predetermined period, the value counted by the counting means is the predetermined value (for example, limit number of times), and the predetermined condition is that the value counted by the counting means exceeds the predetermined value. It is characterized by being included.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the overall rank is calculated such that the higher the number of balls obtained during the JAC game, the higher the evaluation, and the higher the game count during the JAC game, the lower the evaluation. be done. In this way, not only the positive evaluation (the number of balls obtained during the JAC game) but also the negative evaluation (the game count during the JAC game) are incorporated into the ranking, thereby increasing the player's interest in the JAC game. can.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is enumerated below.

Conventionally, the technique of a gaming machine having error determination means capable of determining whether an error has occurred is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-282505).

In the above publication, a game board is provided with fraud detection means for detecting fraudulent magnetism, etc., and when the fraud detection means detects fraudulent magnetism, it is determined that an error has occurred, and the operation of the movable wing is interrupted. machine is disclosed.

However, since magnetism, etc., occurs even when the game machine operates normally, the criteria for determining that an error has occurred (determining fraudulent magnetism, etc.) fluctuates depending on the surrounding environment and the state of the gaming machine. There was a problem that detection could not be performed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing appropriate error determination.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing game control according to game operations performed by the player, and detection means (for example, the main CPU 101) connected to the game control means. (e.g., magnetic sensor), error determination means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not an error has occurred based on the detection signal from the detection means, and an electric drive source for moving the movable body. production device (for example, normal electric accessory 460, special electric accessory 600, first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), second movable accessory unit 82, and third movable accessory unit 83) , a game machine comprising performance control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of controlling the performance device, and transmission means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of transmitting a command from the game control means to the performance control means. After supplying power, the game control means can execute a reference value setting process for setting a reference value as a reference for error determination by the error determination means, and the transmission means activates the game control means. In the initial setting process of time, a command can be transmitted to the effect control means after the reference value setting process is executed, and the effect control means receives the command transmitted from the game control means after power is supplied. In this case, the initialization process including the movement of the movable body can be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making an appropriate error determination.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, after a first period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is executed. After a second period (for example, 12 seconds) longer than the total period (for example, 1 second) required for the initialization process of (1) has passed, the initialization process for the rendering device is executed. Thus, the initialization processing of the effect device and the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor are executed at timings that do not overlap with each other. In this way, the initialization processing of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initialization processing of the sub CPU 201, so the magnetic sensor can be used for the normal electric accessory 460 (starting opening solenoid 462), the special electric accessory 600 (large winning opening solenoid 620 ), the driving system of the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, the third movable accessory unit 83, etc. is stopped, and the peripheral magnetic field at that time is initialized. The state is stored, and the detected value of the initial state is set as the initial value. Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving these driving members. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the initial value and the reference value of the magnetic sensor from being set unduly high. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate fraud detection.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing game control according to game operations performed by the player, and detection means (for example, magnetic sensor), error determination means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether an error has occurred based on the detection signal from the detection means, and an electric drive source for moving the movable body. a device (for example, a normal electric accessory 460, a special electric accessory 600, a first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), a second movable accessory unit 82, and a third movable accessory unit 83); A game machine comprising an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of controlling an effect device, wherein the game control means, after supplying power, sets a reference value as a reference for error determination by the error determination means. It is possible to execute a reference value setting process to be set, the effect control means can execute an initialization process including movement of the movable body after power supply, and the game control means can execute the first After a period of 1 (for example, 10 seconds) has passed, the reference value setting process is executed, and the effect control means performs the first period after power is supplied and the period required for the reference value setting process (for example, 1 second), the initialization process including the movement of the movable body is executed after a second period (for example, 12 seconds) longer than the total period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making an appropriate error determination.

Specifically, since the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initial setting process of the sub CPU 201, the magnetic sensor is the normal electric accessory 460 (starting solenoid 462), the special electric accessory 600 (large winning Solenoid 620), the first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, the third movable accessory unit 83, etc. are stopped, and the surroundings at that time A magnetic field is stored as an initial state, and a detected value of the initial state is set as an initial value. Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving these driving members. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the initial value and the reference value of the magnetic sensor from being set unduly high. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate fraud detection.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing game control according to game operations performed by the player, and detection means (for example, magnetic sensor), error determination means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether an error has occurred based on the detection signal from the detection means, and an electric drive source for moving the movable body. a device (for example, a normal electric accessory 460, a special electric accessory 600, a first movable accessory unit (production device 2400), a second movable accessory unit 82, and a third movable accessory unit 83); A game machine comprising an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of controlling an effect device, wherein the game control means, after supplying power, sets a reference value as a reference for error determination by the error determination means. It is possible to execute a reference value setting process to be set, the effect control means can execute an initialization process including movement of the movable body after power supply, and the game control means can execute the first After a period of 1 (for example, 10 seconds) has passed, the reference value setting process is executed, and the effect control means performs the first period after power is supplied and the period required for the reference value setting process (for example, 1 second) and a second period (for example, 12 seconds) longer than the total period has elapsed, the initialization process including the movement of the movable body is executed, and the game control means initializes the reference value setting process It is characterized in that a game becomes possible after the conversion process is executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making an appropriate error determination.

Specifically, the magnetic sensor initialization process is performed before the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 shift to the playable state. Therefore, the magnetic sensor stores the peripheral magnetic field at that time as an initial state in a state where the drive system driven during a game is stopped, and sets the detection value of the initial state as the initial value. Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving the driving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the initial value and the reference value of the magnetic sensor from being set unduly high. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate fraud detection.

The main CPU 101 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of game control means and error determination means.
Also, the sub CPU 201 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of effect control means.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the payout/launch control circuit 300 and the sub CPU 201 make initial settings at startup and transition to a playable state after waiting for startup (12 seconds) based on their respective wait timers. However, it is not limited to this, and as in the above-described second embodiment, the initial setting at startup and the transition to the playable state may be performed based on the startup command from the main CPU 101. .

16 liquid crystal display device 17 game board 20 game area 100 main control circuit 200 sub control circuit 600 special electric accessory 610 shutter

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a decorative part capable of executing an effect visible to a player,
The decorative part is
light emitting means;
a substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted;
a light guide member that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means;
a base member arranged on the back side of the substrate;
a light transmissive member arranged at a position where light emitted from the light emitting means via the light guide member can enter;
The light transmissive member is
extending from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate to a position outside at least one end of the substrate and beyond the rear surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate;
The base member is
A position formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light, located outside at least one end of the substrate and an end of the light guide member, and beyond the rear surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted. provided at a position capable of reflecting light emitted from the end of the light transmissive member and light emitted from the end of the light guide member,
The light guide member is
A game machine characterized by extending between the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate and the base member in the thickness direction of the substrate .

Images